FOURTH EDITION

ASNT
LEVEL III
STUDY GUIDE
BASIC
 FOURTH EDITION

ASNT
LEVEL III
STUDY GUIDE
BASIC

The American Society for

Nondestructive Testing Inc.
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
The American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc. is grateful for the volunteer contributions, technical expertise, knowledge,
and dedication of the following individuals who have helped make this work possible.

Gina R. Caudill George M. Hopman Richard E. Schram

L. Terry Clausing Hugh K. Howerton Jr. Todd E. Sellmer
Brenda L. Collins Bharath Kodumuru Greg Sides
Bruce G. Crouse Richard D. Lopez James J. Sieger Jr.
Jerry Fulin Luis Alfredo Payano David J. Vigne
Max Harrisson Michael J. Ruddy Andrew B. Webb
David Prior Harvey Juan Carlos Ruiz-Rico
Dietmar F. Henning Daniel R. Ryan
William G. Hoffman Hussein M. Sadek
Tyler Holmes Ram Palani Samy

Copyright © 2023 by The American Society for Nondestructive Testing.

The American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc. (ASNT) is not responsible for the authenticity or accuracy of information herein. Published opinions
and statements do not necessarily reflect the opinion of ASNT. Products or services that are advertised or mentioned do not carry the endorsement or
recommendation of ASNT.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, by means electronic or mechanical including photocopying, recording or other-
wise, without the expressed prior written permission of The American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc.
IRRSP, NDT Handbook, The NDT Technician, and asnt.org are trademarks of The American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc. ACCP, ASNT, ASNT Daily,
Chat NDT with ASNT, Level III Study Guide, Materials Evaluation, Nondestructive Testing Handbook, Research in Nondestructive Evaluation, and RNDE are
registered trademarks of The American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc.
Fourth edition
first printing 1/23
ebook 1/23
Errata, if available for this printing, may be obtained from ASNT’s website, asnt.org. Ebooks contain all corrections and updates, including the latest errata.
ISBN-13: 978-1-57117-496-3 (print)
ISBN-13: 978-1-57117-497-0 (ebook)
Printed in the United States of America.
Published by:
The American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc.
1201 Dublin Road
Suite #G04
Columbus, OH 43215
asnt.org
Publications Team:
Jill Ross, Director of Publications
Editorial:
Cynthia M. Leeman, Educational Materials Supervisor
Haley Cowans, Content Strategist
Production:
Joy Grimm, Production Manager
Synthia Jester, Digital Publishing Manager
ASNT Mission Statement:
ASNT’s mission is to advance the field of nondestructive testing.
Code of Ethics:
The ASNT Code of Ethics was developed to provide members of the Society with broad ethical statements to guide their professional lives. In spirit and in
word, each ASNT member is responsible for knowing and adhering to the values and standards set forth in the Society’s Code. More information, as well as
the complete version of the Code of Ethics, can be found on ASNT’s website, asnt.org.
FOREWORD
Purpose
The Basic examination covers:
This study guide is intended to aid individuals preparing to take Ñ the administration of personnel qualification and certification
the Basic examination as part of the process of becoming certi- programs based on the most recent editions of SNT-TC-1A
fied as an ASNT NDT Level III in one or more NDT methods. It and ANSI/ASNT CP-189: ASNT Standard for Qualification and
is equally useful for persons preparing to take a Basic Level III Certification of Nondestructive Testing Personnel,
examination under an employer’s personnel qualification
Ñ materials fabrication and product technology, and
and certification program per ASNT Recommended Practice
No. SNT-TC-1A: Personnel Qualification and Certification in Ñ general principles and applications of common NDT
Nondestructive Testing (2020). It is not intended to be their only methods.
source of preparation. Each method examination covers:
The material in this study guide addresses the body of Ñ fundamentals and principles of the method,
knowledge included in the Basic examination administered
Ñ applications and establishment of techniques and procedures,
under the ASNT NDT Level III certification program. The ASNT
and
NDT Level III certification program is a service, offered by the
American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc., that gives Ñ interpretation of codes, standards, and specifications relating
NDT personnel an opportunity to have their familiarity with the to the method.
principles and practices of NDT assessed by an independent NOTE: Reference to persons who have met the criteria
body. The program uses an independent body to review creden- for the Level III certifications issued by ASNT are called NDT
tials and uses comprehensive written examinations to identify Level III. This is in contrast to the person who has met the
those persons who meet the criteria for becoming an ASNT criteria of an employer and who is identified as the employer’s
NDT Level III for each NDT method. Method examinations are Level III or just Level III.
offered in:
Ñ acoustic emission testing How to Use the Study Guide
Ñ electromagnetic testing
This study guide divides the subject matter into three main
Ñ leak testing sections corresponding with the three sections of the Basic
Ñ liquid penetrant testing examination:
Ñ magnetic flux leakage Ñ Section I: certification and qualification of NDT personnel as
Ñ magnetic particle testing outlined in SNT-TC-1A and CP-189.

Ñ neutron radiographic testing Ñ Section II: an overview of commonly used NDT methods.

Ñ radiographic testing Ñ Section III: materials and processes in manufacturing and

industry in relation to NDT technology.
Ñ thermal/infrared testing
Ñ ultrasonic testing
Each section of this study guide begins with an intro-
Ñ visual testing duction to the material to be covered. Chapters contain a
NOTE: Five additional methods are listed in SNT-TC-1A but set of representative multiple-choice questions covering the
do not have ASNT examinations at present: ground penetrating relevant portion of the Basic Topical Outlines in ANSI/ASNT
radar, guided wave, laser methods, microwave technology, and CP-105: ASNT Standard Topical Outlines for Qualification of
vibration analysis. Nondestructive Testing Personnel (2020).
The ASNT NDT Level III certification program requires sat- Success in answering the questions will help the user to
isfactory completion of a four-hour Basic examination. Eleven determine if more concentrated study in particular areas is
different NDT method examinations are given with durations needed. If the user can answer the questions confidently and
of two to four hours, depending upon each method’s complex- correctly, additional study may be optional. Technical references
ity. To be eligible to take the ASNT NDT Level III examinations, are listed in Section II for individual methods if users require
persons must qualify by virtue of their documented education further study.
and experience.

FOREWORD iii
 |
SECTION I PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

In 2018 ASNT accepted the ASTM E1316 definitions of cal-

Changes in This Edition
ibration and standardization for use in its publications. These
The fourth edition of the ASNT Level III Study Guide: Basic words are used as follows:
builds on the previous editions. Ñ Calibration is the comparison (which may include adjust-
Section I has been updated to reflect the latest (2020) ment) of a test instrument to a known reference that is
editions of two key ASNT documents: SNT-TC-1A and CP-189. normally traceable to some recognized authority (e.g., NIST).
This book also includes entire sections of both documents Calibration is typically performed by an organization consid-
instead of small excerpts in previous editions. ered qualified to do so (e.g., an accredited laboratory, or in
Likewise, the topical outlines of the NDT methods presented some cases, the instrument manufacturer) at a determined,
in Section II have been drawn from the 2020 edition of CP-105. periodic interval. Calibration of electronic instrumentation
typically involves verification of the linearity of the instru-
Additional Information ment’s response over its usable range.
Ñ Standardization is typically completed prior to performing
In ASNT publications, the words discontinuity and defect have
an NDT test and may also be performed at times during the
specific meanings. These words are used as follows:
performance of the test and at the completion of the test as
Ñ A discontinuity is an intentional (such as drilled holes) or a validation of proper instrument operation. It is the adjust-
unintentional interruption in the physical structure or config- ment of an NDT instrument using a reference standard (that
uration of a material or component. NDT techniques reveal contains a known condition) to obtain or establish a known
indications of discontinuities. Discontinuities may exist and reproducible response.
without being detected.
Because ASNT is an International System of Units (SI) pub-
Ñ A defect is a discontinuity whose size, shape, orientation, or
lisher, typically both SI and imperial units are used with SI units
location make it detrimental to the useful service of the object
appearing first. However, in this study guide units will appear in
or exceed accept/reject criteria of an applicable specification.
the order used in the source document.
Some discontinuities do not exceed an accept/reject criterion
The ACCP program is referenced throughout the 2020
and are therefore not defects.
editions of SNT-TC-1A, CP-189, and CP-105. At the time of publi-
Ñ The process for determining rejectability is interpretation or cation of this study guide, the ACCP program was in the process
evaluation. All defects are discontinuities, but not all disconti- of being replaced with ISO 9712-2021 and will be renamed. This
nuities are defects. change will be made to future editions of the ASNT standards.
CONTENTS
FOREWORD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III General Comments on Section 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Purpose. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Section 11: Interrupted Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
How to Use the Study Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii General Comments on Section 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Changes in This Edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Section 12: Recertification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Inquiries for Section 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
General Comments on Section 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

SECTION I Section 13: Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Personnel Qualification and Certification. . . . . . . 1 Inquiries for Section 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Section 14: Reinstatement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
CHAPTER 1: RECOMMENDED PRACTICE NO. SNT-TC-1A (2020). . . . 1
Inquiries for Section 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
History of SNT-TC-1A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
General Comments on Section 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Contents and Intended Uses of SNT-TC-1A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Section 15: Referenced Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Overview of SNT-TC-1A (2020). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Review Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Foreword. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Sections 1, 2, and 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Sections 1, 2, and 3: Scope, Definitions, and Section 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Nondestructive Testing Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Section 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Inquiries for Section 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Section 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
General Comments on Sections 1, 2, and 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Section 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Section 4: Levels of Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Section 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Inquiries for Section 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Section 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
General Comments on Section 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Section 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Section 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Section 5: Written Practice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Section 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Inquiries for Section 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Section 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
General Comments on Section 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Section 6: Education, Training, and Experience CHAPTER 2: ANSI/ASNT CP-189 (2020). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Requirements for Initial Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Inquiries for Section 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Section 1: Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
General Comments on Section 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Section 2: Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Section 7: Training Programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Section 3: Levels of Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Inquiries for Section 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Section 4: Qualification Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
General Comments on Section 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Section 5: Qualification and Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Section 8: Examinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Section 6: Examinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Inquiries for Section 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Section 7: Expiration, Suspension, Revocation, and
General Comments on Section 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Reinstatement of Employer Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Section 9: Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Section 8: Employer Recertification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Inquiries for Section 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Section 9: Records. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
General Comments on Section 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Section 10: Referenced Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Section 10: Technical Performance Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Review Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Inquiries for Section 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

v
CHAPTER 3: THE ASNT NDT LEVEL III CERTIFICATION PROGRAM . . . 49 Thermal/Infrared Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
ASNT NDT Level III . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Topical Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
What Is an ASNT NDT Level III? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Thermal/Infrared Testing Review Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
ASNT Predictive Maintenance Level III . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Ultrasonic Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Eligibility for ASNT Level III Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Topical Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
NDT/PdM or PdM/NDT Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 UT Review Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Recertification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Visual Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
SNT-TC-1A Certification Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Topical Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Use of the ASNT NDT Level III Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Visual Testing Review Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
ACCP Professional Level III. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Review Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
SECTION III
Materials, Fabrication, and Product
Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
SECTION II
NDT Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 CHAPTER 5: MATERIALS AND PROCESSES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
CHAPTER 4: GENERAL APPLICATIONS OF NDT METHODS. . . . . . . . 53 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Overview of the ASNT Basic Examination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Review Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Topical Outlines, Reference Resources, and Review Chapter 1: Manufacturing and Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Chapter 2: Classification, Structure, and
Solidification of Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Acoustic Emission Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Chapter 3: Properties of Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Topical Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Chapter 4: Production and Properties of
AE Review Questions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Common Metals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Electromagnetic Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Chapter 5: Polymers, Ceramics, and Composites. . . . . . 90
Topical Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Chapter 6: Casting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Chapter 7: Metal Forming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
ET Review Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Chapter 8: Joining and Fastening. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Leak Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Chapter 9: Material Removal Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Topical Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Chapter 10: Surface Treatments and Coatings. . . . . . . 103
LT Review Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Chapter 11: Introduction to Nondestructive Testing. . 104
Liquid Penetrant Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Chapter 12: Nondestructive Testing Methods . . . . . . . 106
Topical Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Chapter 13: NDT Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Chapter 14: NDT and Engineering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
PT Review Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Magnetic Flux Leakage Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Topical Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 APPENDIXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
MFL Review Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 APPENDIX A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Magnetic Particle Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Code of Ethics for Level III Personnel
Certified by ASNT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Topical Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
MT Review Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 APPENDIX B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Neutron Radiographic Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 CP-ASNT-1D: ASNT NDT Level III Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Topical Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Radiographic Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 APPENDIX C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Measurement Units for Nondestructive Testing . . . . . . . . . . 115
Topical Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
RT Review Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
 | SECTION I

CHAPTER 1

RECOMMENDED PRACTICE
NO. SNT-TC-1A (2020)
History of SNT-TC-1A of expert opinion regarding the training of personnel and an
average of requirements for formal education, time for on-
Recommended Practice No. SNT-TC-1A: Personnel the-job training, and documentation.
Qualification and Certification in Nondestructive Testing was The resulting SNT-TC-1A is a recommended practice for the
first published in 1966 as a primary document comprising just qualification and certification of nondestructive test person-
four pages along with a series of supplements for each rec- nel. It provides a format which industry can follow in writing
ognized method at the time: radiographic testing, magnetic an individualized procedure for the qualification and certifi-
particle testing, ultrasonic testing, liquid penetrant testing, and cation of personnel which meets the needs and requirements
eddy current (now electromagnetic testing). Each supplemen- unique to each segment of industry.
tal document included recommended education, experience,
Contents and Intended Uses of SNT-TC-1A
and training requirements, as well as a recommended course
outline, references, and general examination questions. The The following information has been excerpted from the
reasons for which SNT-TC-1A was created and the manner same article cited in the previous section. The text of this article
in which it evolved were described in an article published in has been modified to include changes made in subsequent
Materials Evaluation, October 1968, Vol. 26, No. 10, pp. 12A–14A, editions of SNT-TC-1A.
by Harold Hovland and Carl B. Shaw, titled, “How to Qualify
and Certify NDT Personnel.” The following excerpts outline how It is intended that SNT-TC-1A serve as a guide for each em-
ployer user in preparing their specific personnel qualification
this important recommended practice came into existence:
and certification document (procedure or written practice).

With the increasing complexity and number of nondestruc- SNT-TC-1A sets forth a scope and definitions, it lists the test
tive test methods in use and with greater reliance upon methods, and it explains the various levels of qualifications.
nondestructive testing, industry has not been able to recruit The primary document also details the manner in which
and train personnel in large enough numbers and in a timely personnel are examined and certified. The question arises,
fashion to fill the need. Many customers found that they were “how do I document certification in my particular procedure?”
not receiving the nondestructive test examinations they felt The point to remember here is that the procedure as written
they had paid to receive. by any user of this document must satisfy the requirements
of their company and must be acceptable to the company’s
Large segments of the economy, such as the government and customers. Within this context, certification may take any one
prime contractors, found it expedient to put the responsibility of several forms. It may consist merely of the records of the
for the training and qualification, and verification of the quali- training programs, the examinations, and the grades of the
fications of nondestructive test personnel upon the manufac- examinations. It may require a certificate that states explic-
turer. This resulted in the generation of a number of docu- itly that a particular person is qualified to a given level for a
ments dealing with the question of the training, qualification, specific method. It may take the form of a card upon which an
and certification of nondestructive test personnel. Although employer certifies the level of training and qualification of its
these documents all pertain to the same subject and have the personnel.
same objective, in their details they were often conflicting,
thereby causing undue cost to American industry. The employer has the same responsibility for the qualification
and certification of its NDT personnel as it has for the prod-
Beginning about 1959, a few corporations, government uct. For example, even though an employer may purchase a
agencies, and other technical societies inquired of ASNT as to complete product and sell this product under the company’s
whether the training and qualification of nondestructive test own name, the employer still bears full responsibility to the
personnel was properly the domain of the Society. customer for the quality of that product and for the product
In 1961, the Society, through its Technical Council, assigned being what the company purports it to be. The employer may
a Task Group to study the feasibility of preparing a docu- elect to purchase components and assemble them and sell
ment that would deal with the training requirements and the the result as a complete product; then again, the employer
documentation thereof for the qualification of nondestructive may manufacture all components of the product. In any of
test personnel... [T]he Task Group endeavored to prepare a these cases, the employer bears a certain responsibility. The
recommended practice which could contain the consensus employer is responsible [for ensuring] that what is being sold

1
 |
SECTION I PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

is indeed what it is claimed to be, that it will meet certain which meet the intent of this document. For such contracts,
requirements of quality, that it will not harm the user, and that purchaser and supplier must agree upon acceptability of an
it will not destroy the user’s property. employer’s program.”
The employer may choose to exercise any of these preroga- From a factual point of view, very few employers will
tives in the training, qualification, and certification of its per- conform exactly to all the specific recommendations of
sonnel. The company may employ persons previously trained SNT-TC-1A. Deviation from the recommendations of SNT-TC-1A
and certify these people; however, the responsibility would should be documented in the employer’s written practice.
be the same as if they had been trained and qualified by the
employer. The employer may conduct a training program as
recommended in the documents, examine these individuals, Overview of SNT-TC-1A (2020)
and certify them as to their qualification to do the work. The This section provides a paragraph-by-paragraph overview
employer will exercise this responsibility through a person
of SNT-TC-1A including excerpts from the document, selected
in the organization who is qualified as a Level III, and who
inquiries and official responses provided by the ASNT
is qualified to train or provide the training of the personnel
under them and to exercise judgment as to the qualification SNT-TC-1A Interpretation Panel, and more general comments.
of these personnel. The employer may elect to utilize the The responses of the SNT-TC-1A Interpretation Panel are
Level III services of an outside agency to provide the training, clarifications of intent and are subject to the statement of the
and develop, administer, and grade the examinations for Scope in each edition of SNT-TC-1A, paragraph 1.4: “It is recog-
certification. Regardless of the method used for training and nized that these guidelines may not be appropriate for certain
examination of their personnel, the responsibility for ensuring employers’ circumstances and/or applications. In develop-
that the program utilized complies with their written practice ing a written practice as required in Section 5, the employer
lies with the employer. should review the detailed recommendations presented herein
Questions & Answers Books for selected methods with sam- and modify them, as necessary, to meet particular needs.” The
ple questions for the Level I and Level II General examinations inquiries must be stated in general terms only, because the
and Level III Method examination are available from the ASNT Interpretation Panel cannot serve as a referee between a buyer
Store on the ASNT website (asnt.org). Each question cites the and seller or otherwise become involved in any specific case.
reference used to identify the correct answer. It is intended Inquiries are numbered to include the year of the inquiry and
that the employer’s Level III consider these questions as
refer to the edition of SNT-TC-1A in effect in that year, unless
examples only and should not use them verbatim for qualifi-
otherwise stated in the question. New editions of SNT-TC-1A
cation examinations. In addition to the General examination,
were published for these years: 1968, 1975, 1980, 1984, 1988,
a specific written examination is required. It is intended that
the Specific examination reflect the equipment that is used 1992, 1996, 2001, 2006, 2011, 2016, and 2020. All inquiries
by the employee being examined, that it reflect the require- reprinted below are taken from the most recent edition of
ments of the procedures normally used by the employer, and Interpreting SNT-TC-1A, published annually by ASNT. Minor
that it satisfy the specific requirements of any customer of the editorial changes have been made to keep the style consistent
employer. with the rest of this book. References to paragraphs in prior
A practical examination is also necessary. The practical ex- editions of SNT-TC-1A are the same as in the 2020 edition
amination is primarily a hands-on test and an examination to unless the corresponding paragraph number has been changed,
determine that the examinee understands and knows how to as noted in brackets. As versions of SNT-TC-1A change, the
use the written procedures and the equipment. Test objects older is replaced by the newer version with corrections to be
should be representative of those that the inspector will addressed at recertification time.
most likely encounter. Critical points of reference should be
predetermined for which the examinee will be graded in the
practical examination. This may include such things as close Foreword
adherence to the procedure, action taken when the proce-
The Foreword (p. iii) of SNT-TC-1A (2020) states in part:
dure cannot be followed, handling of the parts being tested,
interpretation of test results, disposition, and the manner in
which a report is written. This Recommended Practice establishes the general frame-
work for a qualification and certification program. In addi-
tion, the document provides recommended educational,
Note the emphasis in the foregoing text on the intent that experience, and training requirements for the different test
SNT-TC-1A should be used as a guideline, not a fixed require- methods. …
ment. This is reaffirmed in 1.2 of the Scope section (p. 1) of The verb “should” has been used throughout this document
SNT-TC-1A (2020) as follows: “This document provides guide- to emphasize the recommendation presented herein. It is the
lines for the establishment of a qualification and certification employer’s responsibility to address specific needs and to
program.” Likewise, in the Foreword, it states, “This recom- modify these guidelines as appropriate in a written practice.
mended practice is not intended to be used as a strict specifica- In the employer’s written practice, the verb “shall” is to be
used in place of “should” to emphasize the employer’s needs.
tion. It is recognized, however, that contracts require programs,
 2.0 Definitions
Sections 1, 2, and 3: Scope, Definitions, and
2.1 Terms included in this document are defined as
Nondestructive Testing Methods follows:
Sections 1, 2, and 3 (Scope, Definitions, and Nondestructive 2.1.1 Calibration, Instrument: the comparison
Testing Methods) on pp. 1–2 of SNT-TC-1A (2020) are reprinted of an instrument with, or the adjustment
below in full: of an instrument to, a known reference(s)
often traceable to the applicable
country’s national institute or standards
1.0 Scope
body. (See also Standardization,
1.1 It is recognized that the effectiveness of
Instrument.)
nondestructive testing (NDT) applications
2.1.2 Certification: written testimony of
depends upon the capabilities of the personnel
qualification.
who are responsible for, and perform, NDT. This
2.1.3 Certifying Authority: the person or
Recommended Practice has been prepared to
persons properly designated in the
establish guidelines for the qualification and
written practice to sign certifications on
certification of NDT personnel whose specific jobs
behalf of the employer.
require appropriate knowledge of the technical
2.1.4 Certifying Agency: the employer of the
principles underlying the nondestructive tests
personnel being certified.
they perform, witness, monitor, or evaluate.
2.1.5 Closed-Book Examination: an
1.2 This document provides guidelines for the
examination administered without
establishment of a qualification and certification
access to reference material except
program.
for materials supplied with or in the
1.3 These guidelines have been developed by The
examination. (See 8.1.3.)
American Society for Nondestructive Testing Inc.
2.1.6 Comparable: being at an equivalent
to aid employers in recognizing the essential
or similar level of NDT responsibility
factors to be considered in qualifying personnel
and difficulty as determined by the
engaged in any of the NDT methods listed in
employer’s NDT Level III.
Section 3.
2.1.7 Detection Rate: the number or
1.4 It is recognized that these guidelines may not be
percentage of false calls allowed for a
appropriate for certain employers’ circumstances
test specimen as defined by the NDT
and/or applications. In developing a written
Level III.
practice as required in Section 5, the employer
2.1.8 Documented: the condition of being in
should review the detailed recommendations
written form.
presented herein and modify them, as necessary,
2.1.9 Employer: the corporate, private, or
to meet particular needs. Such modification may
public entity, which employs personnel
alter but shall not eliminate basic provisions of the
directly or indirectly for wages, salary,
program such as training, experience, testing, and
fees, or other considerations. This
recertification. Supporting technical rationale for
would include employers who obtain
modification of detailed recommendations should
their qualified supplemental workforce
be provided in an Annex to the written practice.
personnel through third-party agencies,
1.5 The use of third-party central certifications
providing the use and certification of those
(e.g., ACCP, ASNT NDT Level II, and other
supplemental employees is addressed in
internationally recognized third-party certification
the employer’s written practice.
programs) may be used in place of employer
2.1.10 Experience: work activities
examinations, as applicable, provided there is
accomplished in a specific NDT
no conflict with the governing industry code or
method under the direction of qualified
standard.
supervision including the performance
1.5.1 For Level II specific and practical
of the NDT method and related activities
examinations, the NDT Level III should
but not including time spent in organized
ensure that the content of these
training programs.
examinations satisfies the requirements
2.1.11 False Call: when an indication and/or
in Sections 8.4 and 8.5, respectively, in
grading unit is incorrectly identified as
the employer’s program.
being a defect.
1.5.2 The use of third-party central
2.1.12 Grading Unit: a Qualification Specimen
certifications satisfying the requirements
can be divided into sections called
for employer-based examinations shall
grading units, which do not have to
be documented in the employer’s written
be equal length or be equally spaced.
practice.
Grading units are unflawed or flawed
and the percentage of flawed/unflawed
grading units required should be
approved by the NDT Level III.

3
 |
SECTION I PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

2.1.13 Limited Certification: nondestructive 2.1.22 Third-Party Agency: a company or

test methods may be further subdivided organization, without an established
into limited disciplines or techniques to written practice, providing supplemental
meet specific employers’ needs; these workforce to the employer; for example,
are NDT Level II certifications, but to a a temporary staffing company.
limited scope. 2.1.23 Training: an organized program
2.1.14 Method: one of the disciplines of NDT; developed to impart the knowledge and
for example, ultrasonic testing, within skills necessary for qualification.
which various test techniques may exist. 2.1.24 Written Practice: a written procedure
2.1.15 Nondestructive Testing: a process developed by the employer that details
that involves the inspection, testing, or the requirements for qualification and
evaluation of materials, components, and certification of their employees.
assemblies for materials’ discontinuities,
properties, and machine problems 3.0 Nondestructive Testing Methods
without further impairing or destroying 3.1 Qualification and certification of NDT personnel
the part’s serviceability. Throughout this in accordance with this Recommended Practice is
document the term NDT applies equally applicable to each of the following methods:
to the NDT methods used for material
inspection, flaw detection, or predictive Acoustic Emission Testing
maintenance (PdM) applications. Electromagnetic Testing
2.1.16 Outside Agency: a company or Ground Penetrating Radar
individual who provides NDT Level III Guided Wave Testing
services and whose qualifications to Laser Methods Testing
provide these services have been Leak Testing
reviewed and approved by the employer Liquid Penetrant Testing
engaging the company or individual. Magnetic Flux Leakage Testing
2.1.17 Personalized Instruction: may consist Magnetic Particle Testing
of blended classroom, supervised Microwave Technology Testing
laboratory, and/or hybrid online Neutron Radiographic Testing
competency-based course delivery. Radiographic Testing
Modular content is covered through Thermal/Infrared Testing
online presentations, in the classroom, Ultrasonic Testing
and/or in small groups. Personalized Vibration Analysis
instruction also enables students to Visual Testing
achieve competency using strategies that
align with their knowledge, skills, and
learning styles. Inquiries for Section 1
2.1.18 Qualification: demonstrated skill,
demonstrated knowledge, documented INQUIRY 76-4
training, and documented experience Paragraph 1.1 of SNT-TC-1A refers to individuals who
required for personnel to properly “perform, witness, monitor, or evaluate” nondestructive tests.
perform the duties of a specific job.
Is it intended that individuals whose principal functions are to
2.1.19 Recommended Practice: a set of
witness, monitor, or evaluate nondestructive tests be qualified
guidelines to assist the employer in
in the same manner as those whose principal function is to
developing uniform procedures for the
qualification and certification of NDT perform nondestructive tests?
personnel to satisfy the employer’s
RESPONSE:
specific requirements.
2.1.20 Standardization, Instrument: the It is intended that the employer designate through the
adjustment of an NDT instrument using written practice as recommended in paragraph 5 specific jobs
an appropriate reference standard, that require knowledge of the technical principles of nonde-
to obtain or establish a known and structive testing. The employer should test the statement of
reproducible response. (This is usually paragraph 1.1, “... personnel whose specific jobs require appro-
done prior to an examination, but can
priate knowledge of the technical principles underlying the non-
be carried out anytime there is concern
destructive tests they perform, witness, monitor, or evaluate,”
about the examination or instrument
against the specific job elements of the personnel in question
response.) (See also Calibration,
Instrument.) in order to establish whether or not the specific job requires
2.1.21 Technique: a category within an knowledge of nondestructive testing.
NDT method; for example, ultrasonic
thickness testing.
 INQUIRY 04-1
NOTE: ASNT has received frequent inquiries from a variety
of sources regarding mandatory imposition of the recommen- 1. Is it the intent of paragraph 1.4 that an employer can modify
dations of SNT-TC-1A into firm and inflexible requirements. By the “Guidelines” of SNT-TC-1A to the extent that Level II and
design, this document lists recommendations which are intended Level III NDT personnel can be “certified” without any exam-
to be used selectively in support of the individual needs of each inations if written this way in the written practice?
employer. However, due in part to such requests for some type
2. What are the limits that are intended regarding how much the
of document mandating requirements, ANSI/ASNT CP-189 was
employer can deviate from SNT-TC-1A as written? If no limits are
developed as a standard that establishes the minimum require-
given, the employer can change the entire context of SNT-TC-1A
ments for the qualification and certification of NDT personnel.
to eliminate all certification exams. Is that the intent?
ASNT always intended that the recommendations of SNT-TC-1A
be applied with flexibility and reason, recognizing that business RESPONSE:
enterprises often may need to satisfy differing customer require-
1. No. The provisions of paragraph 1.4 allow modification of the
ments. The next two inquiries reflect this concept.
detailed recommendations; it is not intended to allow elimi-
INQUIRY 80-4 nation of the basic provisions of the document.

NDT examiners in our employ who perform examinations 2. No. Paragraph 9.2 requires certification in accordance with
using liquid penetrant use only the visible dye, solvent remov- “Section 8, Examinations” as described in the employer’s
able, penetrant technique. Since our examiners do not have need written practice. [In the 2020 edition, this is rephrased as “in
to be qualified in the other liquid penetrant techniques, is it per- accordance with Sections 6, 7, and 8.”]
missible to modify the number of general and specific questions
as well as the hours of training and work experience to satisfy GENERAL COMMENTS [REGARDING INQUIRY 04-1]:
requirements of SNT-TC-1A for Level I and Level II examiners? SNT-TC-1A allows for modification of detailed recommen-
dations as necessary to meet particular needs. The intent is that
RESPONSE: there be a technical rationale to support such modification.
... It is the intent that SNT-TC-1A is a recommended practice Elimination of requirements, such as training, experience, and
and that it is a guideline which should be modified by the examination, goes beyond modification of detailed requirements.
employer as necessary to meet their particular needs. The
INQUIRY 13-3
employer should determine their needs, determine the neces-
sary qualifications of their examiners to meet those needs, and Based on the background information provided below, is
describe those in their written practice. it correct to assume that “qualified supervision” may only be
provided by a certified Level II or III individual, or may supervi-
INQUIRY 80-8 sion be performed by other noncertified management person-
1. May an employer deviate from the guidelines to meet their nel (such as a quality assurance manager) if they are so desig-
specific needs? nated in the employer’s written practice?
2. Is our company’s specific written practice acceptable?
BACKGROUND:

RESPONSE:
Paragraph 2.1.8 of SNT-TC-1A (2011) [paragraph 2.1.10 in the
2020 edition] defines “experience” as “work activities accom-
1. Yes, in accordance with paragraph 1.4 of SNT-TC-1A, the
plished in a specific NDT method under the direction of quali-
employer should modify the guidelines to meet their needs.
fied supervision including the performance of the NDT method
2. It is against ASNT policy to judge the applicability of company and related activities but not including time spent in organized
documents. As a general comment, it is the employer’s training programs.”
prerogative to establish their criteria for certification. It is then The only other place the word “supervision” is used is in
the customer’s prerogative to accept or reject those criteria. paragraph 4.3.1, which says in part, “The NDT Level I should
receive the necessary instruction and supervision from a certi-
NOTE: Paragraph 1.4 very clearly states the intent that the fied NDT Level II or III individual.”
detailed recommendations of SNT-TC-1A should be reviewed
and modified by the user to satisfy unique needs. This allow- RESPONSE:

ance was originally incorporated in recognition of the fact that Yes, the intent of “qualified supervision” is supervision by
each manufacturer or each service organization has a different personnel who are certified Level II or III in the specific method.
clientele. Customer or clientele requirements ultimately deter-
mine what is acceptable between buyer and seller, even to the
details of qualifying NDT personnel.

5
 |
SECTION I PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

INQUIRY 13-10 conferring a certification and, thereby, can be the only “certify-
As per paragraph 2.1.12 of SNT-TC-1A (2006) [paragraph ing agency.” Such absolute responsibility does not preclude the
2.1.18 in the 2020 edition], is it correct to say that knowledge is use of outside services by employers to assist in imparting and/
demonstrated when you clear the written examination (General or assessing qualifications of individuals being certified. The use
and Specific) and skill is demonstrated when you clear the prac- of outside services does not relieve the employer from responsi-
tical examination? bility, nor can the employer abrogate or delegate this responsi-
bility to an outside agency.
BACKGROUND: The definition of “Employer” used in SNT-TC-1A dates back
Qualification is defined in paragraph 2.1.12 [2.1.18 in the [...] to the 1975 Edition. At that time, it was common for NDT
2020 edition] as demonstrated knowledge, demonstrated skill, personnel to work full time, exclusively for one employer. Over
documented training, and documented experience. the years, the employment model of the 1970s has changed
significantly. The use of supplemental personnel during peak
RESPONSE: periods has become a common model for many industries. The
No. Paragraph 2.1.12 [2.1.18 in the 2020 edition] is a defini- model has continued to evolve from using fully tested and cer-
tion, not a statement of requirements. Paragraph 9.2 says that tified personnel supplied by full-service inspection companies,
certification of NDT personnel shall be based on demonstration to third-party organizations providing qualified but not certified
of satisfactory qualification in accordance with Sections 6, 7, and personnel to companies who then certify them in accordance
8, as described in the employer’s written practice. with their program and written practice. While companies rely
on SNT-TC-1A interpretation 83-07 to support that model, later
General Comments on Sections 1, 2, and 3 SNT-TC-1A interpretations 87-02 and 02-01 contradict that inter-
Paragraph 1.4 was modified in the 2011 edition to provide pretation. Since companies continue to use and expand that
users with additional guidance to ensure that when users model, the modified definition change is being submitted to
develop a written practice, the fundamental requirements of more accurately reflect the role of the Employer in the way sup-
SNT-TC-1A are maintained and that any modifications are doc- plemental personnel are used in the NDT workforce.
umented with a rationale for the deviations. This modification SNT-TC-1A has been referenced by certain codes and spec-
was retained in the 2016 and 2020 editions. ifications to be used, in effect, as a model for employers to
In Section 2, Definitions, each of these terms should be care- develop a written practice concerning some method of NDT not
fully studied. For example, some NDT practitioners may not currently covered in SNT-TC-1A.
clearly understand the difference between “qualification” and
“certification.” Considering each term as representing a process, Review Questions for Sections 1, 2, and 3
the process of qualifying personnel involves assessment of the Based on the foregoing discussion, answer the questions
adequacy of the skills, training, and experience of personnel on pp. 27–28 relating to SNT-TC-1A and the administration of a
being considered for certain tasks. The process of qualifying may qualification and certification program in NDT.
require that education and training be imparted to such person-
nel. Assessment of qualifications often requires that personnel
Section 4: Levels of Qualification
be examined. Following the process of qualification, individuals
meeting or exceeding the minimum qualification requirements Section 4 (p. 3) of SNT-TC-1A (2020) is reprinted below in full:
of the employer can be certified. That is, the employer provides
evidence that a qualifying process was followed. Such evidence 4.0 Levels of Qualification
backs up the employer’s assertion that certain individuals are 4.1 There are three basic levels of qualification.
qualified to perform certain critical functions and is the employ- The employer may subdivide these levels for
er’s “certification” that the evidence of qualification exists. situations where additional levels are deemed
Limited certifications for ultrasonic thickness measurement necessary for specific skills and responsibilities.
4.2 While in the process of being initially trained,
and radiographic film interpretation have been retained in this
qualified, and certified, an individual should be
edition. These certifications are intended to be limited in the
considered a trainee. A trainee should work with
scope of qualification, but not the responsibilities of the Level II a certified individual. The trainee should not
individual as defined in Section 4. There is no Level I limited independently conduct, interpret, evaluate, or
certification. report the results of any NDT test.
Fundamental in free enterprise is the tenet that producers 4.3 The recommended technical knowledge and skill
of goods and suppliers of services are ultimately responsible sets for the three basic levels of qualification are
for the quality and effectiveness of such goods and services as as follows:
well as bearing responsibility for shortcomings and failures.
Therefore, regardless of the details of the processes by which
individuals became qualified, the direct employer of the per-
sonnel being certified must bear the end responsibility for
4.3.1 NDT Level I. An NDT Level I Inquiries for Section 4
individual should have sufficient
technical knowledge and skills to be INQUIRY 76-5
qualified to properly perform specific In accordance with SNT-TC-1A (1975 edition), may a Level I
standardizations, specific NDT, and NDT person who has been trained, qualified, and certified in
specific evaluations for acceptance or
accordance with SNT-TC-1A (1975 edition) be the sole person to
rejection determinations according to
perform, evaluate, and sign for final acceptance of NDT exam-
written instructions and to record results.
inations in accordance with written procedures and acceptance
The NDT Level I should receive the
necessary instruction or supervision from standards with occasional surveillance and guidance from a
a certified NDT Level II or III individual. Level II or III?
4.3.2 NDT Level II. An NDT Level II individual
should have sufficient technical RESPONSE:
knowledge and skills to be qualified to Yes. The intent in SNT-TC-1A is that the Level I person may
set up and standardize equipment and perform the above functions provided they are in accordance
to interpret and evaluate results with with written procedures and so documented in the employer’s
respect to applicable codes, standards, written practice.
and specifications. The NDT Level II
should be thoroughly familiar with the INQUIRY 03-2
scope and limitations of the methods
May an NDT Level III develop, qualify, and approve NDT
for which qualified and should exercise
assigned responsibility for on-the-job procedures, and establish and approve techniques in the
training and guidance of trainees and methods in which not certified?
NDT Level I personnel. The NDT Level II
should be able to organize and report RESPONSE:
the results of NDT tests. No, see the response to 90-1, Part 2 and Inquiry 10-5.
4.3.3 NDT Level III. An NDT Level III
individual should have sufficient RESPONSE TO INQUIRY 90-1, PART 2:
technical knowledge and skills to be Paragraph 4.3.3 of SNT-TC-1A (1980 edition), states ASNT’s
capable of developing, qualifying, and
recommendations for an employer to consider when selecting
approving procedures, establishing
their Level III. The last sentence specifies that a Level III should
and approving techniques, interpreting
be familiar with other methods and should be qualified by expe-
codes, standards, specifications, and
procedures; and designating the rience and training. The intent is to train and examine Level I
particular NDT methods, techniques, and Level II personnel for certification in the methods in which
and procedures to be used. The NDT they are qualified. This is further clarified in SNT-TC-1A (1988
Level III should be responsible for the edition), paragraph 4.3.3, which states, “The NDT Level III, in
NDT operations for which qualified methods in which certified, should [have sufficient technical
and assigned and should be capable knowledge and skills to] be capable of training and examining
of interpreting and evaluating results NDT Level I and II personnel for certification in those methods.”
in terms of existing codes, standards,
and specifications. The NDT Level INQUIRY 09-1
III should have sufficient practical
background in applicable materials, 1. With regard to NDT Level IIIs signing off on certification
fabrication, and product technology after successful completion of trainees’ examinations, is it
to establish techniques and to assist in the intention that the NDT Level III must be certified in the
establishing acceptance criteria when method for which they are signing off as per SNT-TC-1A
none are otherwise available. The NDT paragraph 4.3.3?
Level III should have general familiarity
2. Is it commonly accepted in the industry that an NDT Level III
with other appropriate NDT methods,
can sign off on certifications for methods other than those in
as demonstrated by an ASNT Level III
which they are certified?
Basic examination or other means. The
NDT Level III, in the methods in which
RESPONSE:
certified, should have sufficient technical
knowledge and skills to be capable of 1. This question refers to two separate issues.
training and examining NDT Level I and a. Can an NDT Level III sign off on certifications in methods
II personnel for certification in those for which they are not qualified? Yes. Signing off on certifi-
methods.
cation is covered by Section 9.0, Certification Record, and
paragraph 9.4.9 states that a person’s certification record
must have the signature of the Level III who verified the
qualifications of a candidate for certification. It does not

7
 |
SECTION I PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

INQUIRY 11-1
require that this Level III be certified in the applicable test
methods. With regard to paragraphs 2.1.8 [2.1.10 in the 2020 edition],
b. Can an NDT Level III develop and approve the training 4.2, and 4.3 of the 2006 edition of SNT-TC-1A:
and examination program for NDT methods they are 1. May an NDT trainee gain experience hours while working
not qualified in? No. Paragraph 4.3.3 states that the NDT under the direct supervision of a Level I in the method?
Level III should be capable of training and examining NDT 2. Are there any circumstances that would allow NDT trainees
Level I and II personnel for certification in those methods or NDT Level I technicians to progress to the next certifica-
for which the Level III holds certification. tion level without ever having gained actual field experience
2. Determining industry practice is not within the scope of working with NDT Level II or Level III technicians in the
SNT-TC-1A. method?

RESPONSE:
INQUIRY 09-2
1. … Yes, provided the Level I receives the necessary instructions
Should NDT Level I technicians be allowed to make the final
or supervision from a certified Level II or III individual.
determination as to whether a production part is accepted or
rejected and then sign off on the production order paperwork if 2. No. As stated in paragraph 2.1.8 [2.1.10 in the 2020 edition],
they follow a step-by-step procedure developed by a Level III? experience can only be gained while working under the
direction of qualified supervision.
RESPONSE:
INQUIRY 15-11
Level I personnel may accept or reject parts according to
written instructions and record results. Reporting the final Can an employer create a Limited Level I certification and
results requires a Level II or III. delete the NDT Level II or III supervision requirement described
in paragraph 4.3.1 (2011 edition) if properly documented in the
company’s written practice?
INQUIRY 10-5

As stated in the SNT-TC-1A 2006 edition, paragraph 4.0 RESPONSE:

Level of Qualification, 4.3.3 NDT Level III: “An NDT Level III No.
individual should be capable of developing, qualifying and
INQUIRY 16-2
approving procedures..., etc.”
The appendix of example questions (Level I and Level II)
QUESTION: has a note in the opening paragraph that states, “All questions
1. Does it mean that all NDT procedures/standard operating and answers should be referenced to a recognized source.”
procedures (SOP) should be prepared by an NDT Level III? What is considered recognized?
2. Could an NDT Level II prepare a specific procedure based on
RESPONSE:
the related standard or specification?
Paragraph 4.3.3 makes the Level III responsible for training
EXAMPLE: and examining NDT Level I and II personnel for certification.
The NDT Level I prepares NDT procedures for ferro- That implies that the Level III is responsible for selection of the
magnetic connection inspection based on API RP7G and reference material, approval of lesson plans, and so on. In des-
API Spec 7 and all procedures actually adopted from the ignating student study material and handouts, the Level III is
referenced specifications. recognizing such material.
1. Could the director of the company (inspection agency)
approve this SOP, or General Comments on Section 4
Implicit in the definitions of Level I, Level II, and Level III
2. Should this SOP be reviewed and approved by the NDT
as outlined in paragraphs 4.3.1, 4.3.2, and 4.3.3 is the concept
Level III?
that the qualifications for Level III equal and exceed those of
RESPONSE:
Level II. The employer must be satisfied with the proficiency of
any individual at any level to handle work tasks. SNT-TC-1A is
1. No.
not intended for use to determine an individual’s proficiency. It
2. 3. 4. The scope of SNT-TC-1A is limited to guidelines for the is intended as a guideline to establish qualifications.
qualification and certification of NDT personnel. The capa-
bility of developing, qualifying, and approving procedures is a Review Questions for Section 4
qualification for Level IIIs. This does not preclude individuals Based on the foregoing discussion, answer the questions on
who are not Level IIIs from also having some or all of those pp. 28–29.
skills. SNT-TC-1A does not restrict employers from using indi-
viduals they feel are qualified for doing those tasks.
Section 5: Written Practice 2. Paragraph 5.3 states that the written practice should list
the training, experience, and examination requirements by
Section 5 (p. 3) of SNT-TC-1A (2020) is reprinted below in full:
method and technique, as applicable. When the employ-
er’s written practice lists techniques not explicitly listed in
5.0 Written Practice Tables 6.3.1A or 8.3.4, do the cumulative training and experi-
5.1 The employer shall establish a written practice for ence hours apply to the method rather than to each technique
the control and administration of NDT personnel to be used in the method?
training, examination, and certification.
5.2 The employer’s written practice should describe
RESPONSE:
the responsibility of each level of certification
1. Yes.
for determining the acceptability of materials or
components in accordance with the applicable 2. The training, experience, and examination requirements
codes, standards, specifications, and procedures. for techniques must be determined by the employer and
5.3 The employer’s written practice should describe specified in the employer’s written practice.
the training, experience, and examination
requirements for each level of certification by
method and technique, as applicable. General Comments on Section 5
5.4 The employer’s written practice should identify Implicit in the use of SNT-TC-1A is the requirement that the
the test techniques within each test method employer shall develop a written practice. SNT-TC-1A provides
applicable to its scope of operations. the guidelines; the written practice sets forth the details. When
5.5 The employer’s written practice shall be reviewed departures from SNT-TC-1A guidelines are made, the written
and approved by the employer’s NDT Level III.
practice should record the departure. It is good practice to
5.6 The employer’s written practice shall be
record all departures, even when they represent situations in
maintained on file.
excess and/or with greater strength than the recommendations
of SNT-TC-1A.
Inquiries for Section 5
Review Questions for Section 5
INQUIRY 16-3 Based on the foregoing discussion, answer the questions on
1. Do paragraphs 5.3 and 5.4 of SNT-TC-1A (2011) require p. 29.
the written practice to clearly identify and describe each
technique for certification for PT, MT, VT, and so on, whose Section 6: Education, Training, and Experience
techniques are not specified in Table 6.3.1A and 6.3.1B? Requirements for Initial Qualification
2. If yes, should NDE techniques for above be identified and
Section 6 (p. 3) of SNT-TC-1A (2020) is reprinted below in full:
described as specified in T-X50 of ASME Boiler & Pressure
Vessel Code (BPVC), Section V, 2015 edition?
6.0 Education, Training, and Experience Requirements
for Initial Qualification
RESPONSE:
6.1 Candidates for certification in NDT should have
1. SNT-TC-1A is intended to provide the employer with adequate sufficient education, training, and experience
flexibility to accommodate a variety of special needs, as docu- to ensure qualification in those NDT methods in
mented in the written practice. The methods and techniques which they are being considered for certification.
presented in SNT-TC-1A, along with the training outlines Documentation of prior certification may be used
in ANSI/ASNT CP-105, are guidelines based on method by an employer as evidence of qualification for
committee input from multiple industries. comparable levels of certification.
6.2 Documented training and/or experience gained
2. Application to other codes and standards is beyond the scope
in positions and activities comparable to those of
of the SNT-TC-1A Interpretation Committee.
Levels I, II, and/or III prior to establishment of the
employer’s written practice may be considered in
INQUIRY 18-3 satisfying the criteria of Section 6.3.
1. Paragraph 5.4 refers to listing specific test techniques to be 6.3 To be considered for certification, a candidate
should satisfy one of the following criteria for the
used in the written practice. Should test techniques that are
applicable NDT level:
not explicitly listed in Table 6.3.1A or Table 8.3.4 (e.g., water
washable vs. solvent removable PT) be differentiated and
listed in the written practice?

9
 |
SECTION I PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

6.3.1 NDT Levels I and II be considered to include experience gained in “an assign-
Table 6.3.1A lists the recommended ment comparable to that of an NDT Level II” [as stated in
training and experience hours to paragraph 6.3.1(a)] in determining the prerequisite require-
be considered by the employer in ments of a candidate for certification as a Level III?
establishing written practices for initial
qualification of NDT Level I and Level II RESPONSE:
individuals.
Paragraph 6.2 of the 1975 edition of SNT-TC-1A states,
Table 6.3.1B lists initial training and
“Documented training and/or experience gained in positions
experience hours, which may be
considered by the employer for specific and activities equivalent to those of Level II or Level III prior to
limited applications as defined in the establishment of the employer’s written practice and a certifica-
employer’s written practice. tion program in accordance with this document shall be consid-
Limited certifications should apply to ered as satisfying the criteria of paragraph 6.2.1 [6.3.1 in the 2020
individuals who do not meet the full edition] and 6.3.” If documentation was not produced during
training and experience of Table 6.3.1A. such prior experience, an affidavit or other suitable testimony
Limited certifications issued in any regarding such experience may be evaluated by the employer to
method should be approved by the aid in determining equivalence.
NDT Level III and documented in the
certification records. INQUIRIES 79-14 AND 79-15
6.3.2 NDT Level III
Is it intended per SNT-TC-1A (1975 edition) that the time
6.3.2.1 Have a bachelor’s degree
(or higher) in engineering or spent in a laboratory exercise during a long-term NDT course
science, plus one additional be considered the only qualifying work time experience?
year of experience beyond the May the laboratory time be given any credit at all as “work
Level II requirements in NDT time experience” to satisfy all the requirements in Table 6.2.1A
in an assignment comparable [6.3.1A in the 2020 edition]?
to that of an NDT Level II in the
applicable NDT method(s), or: RESPONSE:
6.3.2.2 Have completed with passing It is not intended that laboratory experience in an educa-
grades at least two years of
tional program be directly applied to the work time experi-
engineering or science study
ence. Laboratory experience is not necessarily applicable to
at a university, college, or
the employer’s product or to the specific codes, standards, or
technical school, plus two
additional years of experience specifications in use. However, in recognition of the benefits
beyond the NDT Level II accruing from laboratory experience, the employer may include
requirements in NDT in an such consideration for adjustment to the work experience in
assignment at least comparable their written practice. Should the employer decide to do so, he
to that of NDT Level II in the or she should thoroughly evaluate the curriculum to determine
applicable NDT method(s), or: its applicability.
6.3.2.3 Have four years of experience
beyond the NDT Level II INQUIRY 83-8
requirements in NDT in an
We desire to have a member of management for our NDT
assignment at least comparable
Level III who, by virtue of their job duties, will not have worked
to that of an NDT Level II in the
as a Level II. Clarification is needed relative to SNT-TC-1A (1980
applicable NDT method(s).
The above NDT Level III edition), paragraphs 6.3.2.1, 6.3.2.2, or 6.3.2.3. The employee may
requirements may be partially also not have any previous experience in the particular disci-
replaced by experience pline. The questions are:
as a certified NDT Level II 1. How can a person become a Level III if they have not had a
or by assignments at least Level II assignment?
comparable to NDT Level II
2. What types of other experiences could be counted for the
as defined in the employer’s
written practice. Level II requirements?

RESPONSE:
Inquiries for Section 6
1. An individual may be given credit for work assignments
INQUIRY 77-4 comparable to that of an NDT Level II in the applicable test
method.
May the experience requirements expressed as “certified
NDT Level II” in paragraph 6.3.1(b), (c) and (d) of the 1975 2. The types of work assignments comparable to the Level II
edition of SNT-TC-1A [6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 in the 2020 edition] assignments should be defined by the employer in their
written practice.
T A B L E 6 . 3 .1 A

Recommended Initial Training and Experience Levels

Experience
NDT Training
Examination Method Technique
Level Hours Minimum Hours in Method
or Technique Total Hours in NDT

I 40 210 400
Acoustic Emission Testing
II 40 630 1200
I 40 210 400
AC Field Measurement
II 40 630 1200
I 40 210 400
Electromagnetic Testing Eddy Current Testing
II 40 630 1200
I 40 210 400
Remote Field Testing
II 40 630 1200
I 8 60 120
Ground Penetrating Radar
II 20 420 800
I 40 240 460
Guided Wave Testing
II 40 240 460
I 8 70 130
Profilometry
II 24 140 260
Laser Methods Testing
I 40 210 400
Holography/Shearography
II 40 630 1200
I 2 3 15
Bubble Leak Testing
II 4 35 80
I 24 105 200
Pressure Change Leak Testing
II 16 280 530
Leak Testing
I 12 105 200
Halogen Diode Leak Testing
II 8 280 530
I 40 280 530
Mass Spectrometer Leak Testing
II 24 420 800
I 4 70 130
Liquid Penetrant Testing
II 8 140 270
I 16 70 130
Magnetic Flux Leakage
II 12 210 400
I 12 70 130
Magnetic Particle Testing
II 8 210 400
Microwave Technology I 40 210 400
Testing II 40 630 1200
Neutron Radiographic I 28 420 800
Testing II 40 1680 2400
I 40 210 400
Radiography
II 40 630 1200
I 40 210 400
Computed Radiography
II 40 630 1200
Radiographic Testing
I 40 210 400
Computed Tomography
II 40 630 1200
I 40 210 400
Digital Radiography
II 40 630 1200
I 32 210 400
II Building Diagnostics 34 1260 1800
Thermal/ Infrared Testing
II Electrical and Mechanical Testing 34 1260 1800
II Materials Testing 34 1260 1800
I 40 210 400
II 40 630 1200
Ultrasonic Testing II Full Matrix Capture 80 320 n/a
II Phased Array Ultrasonic Testing 80 320 n/a
II Time of Flight Diffraction 40 320 n/a
I 24 420 800
Vibration Analysis
II 72 1680 2400
I 8 70 130
Visual Testing
II 16 140 270

11
 |
SECTION I PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

TABLE 6.3.1 A NOTES:

1.0 A person may be qualified directly to NDT Level II with no time as a certified NDT Level I, providing the recommended training
and experience consists of the sum of the hours recommended for NDT Level I and Level II.
2.0 For NDT Level III certification, the experience should consist of the sum of the hours for NDT Level I and
Level II, plus the additional time in 6.3.2, as applicable. The formal training should consist of the NDT Level I
and Level II training, plus any additional formal training as defined in the employer’s written practice.
3.0 Listed training hours may be adjusted as described in the employer’s written practice depending on the candidate’s actual
education level, e.g. grammar school, college graduate in engineering, etc.
4.0 Training should be outlined in the employer’s written practice. MT training hours may be counted toward MFL training hours as
defined in employer’s written practice.
5.0 If an individual is currently certified in an ET technique and a full-course format was used to meet the initial qualifications in
that technique, the minimum training hours to qualify in another ET technique at the same NDT level may be reduced up to
40% if so defined in the employer’s written practice. If an individual is certified in an ET technique, the minimum experience
to qualify for another ET technique at the same level or to the next level may be reduced by up to 50% if so defined in the
employer’s written practice.
6.0 While fulfilling total NDT experience requirement, experience may be gained in more than one method, however, the
minimum hours must be met for each method.
7.0 If an individual is currently certified in an RT technique and a full-course format was used to meet the initial qualifications in
that technique, the minimum additional training hours to qualify in another technique at the same level should be 24 hours
(of which at least 16 hours should be equipment familiarization). The training outline should be as defined in the employer’s
written practice. If an individual is certified in a technique, the minimum additional experience required to qualify for another
technique at the same level may be reduced by up to 50%, as defined in the employer’s written practice.
8.0 Independent of the training recommended for Level I and Level II certification, a trainee is required to receive radiation safety
training as required by the regulatory jurisdiction.
9.0 If an individual is currently certified in one IR technique and a full-course format was used to meet the initial qualifications in
that technique, the minimum additional training hours to qualify in another technique at the same level should be 20 hours
(of which at least 16 hours should be specific technique familiarization). The training outline should be as defined in the
employer’s written practice. If an individual is certified in a technique, the minimum additional experience required to qualify
for another technique at the same level may be reduced by up to 50%, as defined in the employer’s written practice.
10.0 Full Matrix Capture (FMC), Time of Flight Diffraction (TOFD), and Phased Array Ultrasonic Testing (PAUT) require Ultrasonic
Testing Level II certification as a prerequisite.
11.0 In addition to the training recommended in this table for FMC, TOFD, and PAUT, supplemental specific hardware and software
training should be required for automated or semiautomated technique applications. The employer’s written practice should
fully describe the nature and extent of the additional training required for each specific acquisition or analysis software and
instrument/system used. The employer’s written practice should also describe the means by which the examiner’s qualification
will be determined for automated and semiautomated techniques.

T A B L E 6 . 3 .1 B

Recommended Initial Training and Experience Levels for NDT Level II Limited Certifications
Minimum Work
Formal
Examination Method Limited Certification Technique Technician’s Starting Point Experience in Technique
Training
(Hours)

Film Interpretation Non-Radiographer 40 220

Radiographic Testing
Film Interpretation RT Level I 24 220

Digital Thickness Measurement

Trainee 8 40
(numeric output only)
Ultrasonic Testing
A-scan Thickness Measurement Trainee 24 175
INQUIRY 94-1 RESPONSE:
Please clarify ASNT’s intent regarding the phrase, “assign- 1. SNT-TC-1A requires the employer develop a written practice
ment comparable to that of an NDT Level II” as it [is] related and, where necessary, modify the requirements of SNT-TC-1A
to SNT-TC-1A, 1984 edition, paragraph 6.3.2.1. I interpret this to meet its needs, pending customer acceptance of those
statement to mean: even though an individual has a four-year changes.
degree in science or engineering, they should also have the 2. SNT-TC-1A requires the employer develop a written practice
“documented” NDT training and experience commensurate and, where necessary, modify the requirements of SNT-TC-1A
with that of a Level II. This documented training should follow to meet its needs, pending customer acceptance of those
the guidelines established in Table 6.3.1 of SNT-TC-1A (1984 changes.
edition) [Table 6.3.1A in the 2020 edition]. It also requires (in
my opinion) this individual practice as a Level II for at least one
INQUIRY 14-4
year before being eligible for Level III certification.
When applying paragraph 6.3.2.1 (2006 edition) for Level III
RESPONSE: qualification in five methods (MT, PT, UT, RT, and VT) with
Please reference Inquiry 83-8. graduation from a four-year college, is it acceptable to require in
total one year of NDT experience beyond the Level II require-
INQUIRY 13-5 ments (that is, total additional experience of 1600 hours in
According to SNT-TC-1A (2011), is it acceptable that an one or more of the five methods, as specified in our written
employer considers training and examination received prior practice), in excess of the total hours in NDT required for
to completion of experience requirements as evidence of Level II, per Table 6.3.1A (that is, for RT and UT 1600 h), and
qualification? documented work experience in each of the five methods fulfill-
ing the required hours for Level I plus Level II as required per
BACKGROUND: Table 6.3.1A for each of the five methods?
Employer will permit a new employee as trainee only if the
trainee has subject knowledge and ability to use equipment/ RESPONSE:

technique safely is established, thus seeking organized training The candidate should meet 100% of the Level I and II
before experience. written practice requirements for a method before beginning
the acquiring of additional time in that method for Level III.
RESPONSE: It is intended that 100% of the experience time specified
Yes. Training and examination are partial requirements for in paragraph 6.3.2 be met in each applicable test method. The
the qualifications. A person cannot be considered qualified until intent of the experience requirement of paragraph 6.3.2 is that
all qualification requirements (training, examinations, experi- the candidate should be actively working and acquiring progres-
ence, and visual acuity test) have been met. sive experience in the methods for which certification is sought.
Just “maintaining” a valid certification does not meet this intent.
INQUIRY 13-6 The employer’s written practice should specify the requirements
1. SNT-TC-1A (2011) allows for modification of detailed recom- regarding qualifying work time experience.
mendations as necessary for the particular needs of the
INQUIRY 14-5
employer. In Table 6.3.1B where it requires practical review
of 1000 radiographs for the limited certification of radiologic When requirements are changed on a new revision of an
testing (RT) film interpretation, does SNT-TC-1A allow for a employer’s written practice, starting the effective date of the new
reduction in the practical review of the radiographs to suit a revision, which requirements shall be followed for those per-
specific sector? sonnel certified under the old revision? Should the new require-
ments in the new revision replace the older requirements in the
2. SNT-TC-1A requires a Level II qualification to allow for limited
previous edition for those personnel certified under the previous
certification and qualification in a specific method (RT film
revision?
interpretation). Is this a requirement that does not allow for
change to suit the employer needs in its specific sector?
RESPONSE:

BACKGROUND:
Paragraph 6.0, Table 6.3.1A, and Table 6.3.1B apply only to
initial experience required for qualification and certification. New
1. This is to stipulate the requirements for industrial experience
requirements are not intended to be retroactive to previously
in a specific sector of the employer that needs to draw up a
certified individuals. The current written practice as it relates to
written practice for its needs.
recertification would be applicable at the time of recertification.
2. Limited qualifications are obtained for authorized inspection
authorities to sign off images, with the intent to accept or
reject the images for quality assurance purposes.

13
 |
SECTION I PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

INQUIRY 15-7 In the 2011 edition of SNT-TC-1A, Table 6.3.1B from the 2006
1. Per paragraph 6.3.2.2, does the requirement for two years of edition was removed, thus eliminating the so-called “25% rule.”
experience apply to initial certification only or does it apply to This rule stated, “Initial experience may be gained simultaneously
every method? in two or more methods if the candidate spends a minimum of
25% of his [or her] work time on each method for which certifica-
2. After passing my first NDT Level III method, can I sit for
tion is sought.” Table 6.3.1A requires that experience be accumu-
additional methods as long as I fulfill the requirement of
lated by hours rather than months and both minimum and total
Table 6.3.1 A, or do I need to document two years of experi-
experience hours must be satisfied. See note 6.0.
ence for each method?
NOTE: Table 6.3.1B in the 2006 edition was titled “Alternate
RESPONSE:
Initial Training and Experience Levels” and was deleted in
the 2011 edition. Table 6.3.1C, “Initial Training and Experience
1. It applies to each applicable method.
Levels for Level II Limited Certifications,” in the 2006 edition
2. The requirement for experience in any additional method replaced Table 6.3.1B in the 2011 edition. This change was
would not be met until the two-year experience beyond retained in the 2016 and 2020 editions; however, the title of
NDT Level II requirement—as defined in Table 6.3.1A—in an Table 6.3.1B was amended to “Recommended Initial Training
assignment at least comparable to that of an NDT Level II in and Experience Levels for Level II Limited Certifications.”
the additional method are met.
Review Questions for Section 6
INQUIRY 17-5 Based on the foregoing discussion, answer the questions on
Are the training and experience requirements of paragraph pp. 30–31.
6.3.2 of SNT-TC-1A satisfied if the person holds a current ASNT
Level III certificate in the specific method?
Section 7: Training Programs
RESPONSE: Section 7 (p. 6) of SNT-TC-1A (2020) is reprinted below in full:
SNT-TC-1A does not address the Level III certificate as a
verification that the certificate holder has met the training and 7.0 Training Programs
experience requirements. 7.1 Personnel being considered for initial certification
should complete sufficient organized training.
General Comments on Section 6 The organized training may include instructor-
Paragraph 6.3.1, like the rest of SNT-TC-1A, is only a guide. led training, personalized instruction, virtual
instructor-led training, computer-based training,
The employer’s written practice should detail all such require-
or web-based training. Computer-based training
ments, which may differ from the recommendations of para-
and web-based training should track hours and
graph 6.3.1. content of training with student examinations in
Table note 5.0 provides for reductions in training hours accordance with 7.2. The sufficiently organized
and experience based on additional ET certifications. Similarly, training shall be such as to ensure the student
in Table 6.3.1A of the 2011 edition of SNT-TC-1A, this same is thoroughly familiar with the principles and
approach was used to divide radiographic testing (RT) into four practices of the specified NDT method related to
techniques. Table note 7.0 provides for reductions in training the level of certification desired, and applicable to
hours and experience based on additional RT certifications. the processes to be used and the products to be
Additional reductions are allowed for the thermal/infrared tested. All training programs should be approved
method based on its three techniques in table note 9.0. by the NDT Level III responsible for the applicable
method.
Inquiry 77-4 points to consideration given in SNT-TC-1A to
7.2 The training program should include sufficient
the initial establishment of a formal qualification and certifica-
examinations to ensure understanding of the
tion program. Paragraph 6.2 recognizes that prior to establish- necessary information.
ing a program and a written practice, the employer may have 7.3 Recommended training course outlines and
provided training as well as other essentials of qualifying NDT references for NDT Levels I, II, and III personnel,
personnel without formal procedures. Hence, documentation which may be used as technical source material,
of such activities could provide evidence of the equivalence are contained in ANSI/ASNT CP-105: ASNT
of prior activities with those recommended in SNT-TC-1A. Standard Topical Outlines for Qualification of
Paragraphs 6.3.2.1, 6.3.2.2, and 6.3.2.3 use the phrase “in an Nondestructive Testing Personnel.
assignment at least comparable to that of an NDT Level II.” In 7.4 The employer who purchases outside training
other words, the experience can be “comparable to that of an services is responsible for assuring that such
services meet the requirements of the employer’s
NDT Level II” if documentation can be produced that substanti-
written practice.
ates the comparability.
Inquiries for Section 7 out of sync due to different publication dates is eliminated and
provides a common set of outlines for both SNT-TC-1A and
INQUIRY 84-4 CP-189.
1. Can home-study (correspondence) courses allow one to meet In the 2011 edition of SNT-TC-1A, paragraph 7.1 was
the training requirements of SNT-TC-1A? Would the course modified to clarify the use of alternative means for training such
better meet SNT-TC-1A if it included quizzes which were as computer and/or web-based training. Guidance was also
mailed back to the responsible “Level III agency” for evalua- included to ensure that such training provides the user with
tion, allowing the agency to offer direction to the participant? contact hours, correlation to the applicable training outline, and
appropriate examinations. This change has been maintained in
2. How many hours credit for training received would the partic-
the 2020 edition.
ipant be given? Would this be determined by the authors of
the course?
Review Questions for Section 7
RESPONSE: 3. Based on the foregoing discussion, answer the questions on
1. Yes. A home-study or correspondence course may be used p. 31.
toward satisfaction of SNT-TC-1A recommended training
provided it is organized as a course with sufficient quizzes to Section 8: Examinations
assure an understanding of the material and that it is specif-
Section 8 (pp. 6–11) of SNT-TC-1A (2020) is reprinted below
ically described in the employer’s written practice. Quizzes
in full:
associated with a home-study or correspondence course
may be used toward compliance with paragraph 7 to insure
8.0 Examinations
comprehension of training information, but not toward
8.1 Administration and Grading
compliance with Section 8, Examinations.
8.1.1 All qualification examination questions
2. The credit hours should be determined by the Level III shall be approved by the NDT Level III
responsible for the course as reflected in the employer’s responsible for the applicable method.
written procedure. 8.1.2 An NDT Level III should be responsible
for the administration and grading of
INQUIRY 07-1 examinations specified in Section 8.3
through 8.8 for NDT Level I, II, or other
Per the 2001 edition of SNT-TC-1A, paragraphs 7.1, 7.2, and Level III personnel. The administration
9.4.4, and Tables 6.3.1A and 6.3.1B: and grading of examinations may be
1. Can computer or web-based NDT training with associated delegated to a qualified representative
electronic quizzes be used to satisfy the training requirements of the NDT Level III and so recorded. A
described in paragraphs 7.1 and 7.2? qualified representative of the employer
may perform the actual administration
2. If so, how should an employer document that training hours and grading of NDT Level III
meet the recommended hours listed in Tables 6.3.1A and examinations specified in 8.7.
6.3.1B so they can comply with the “satisfactory completion” 8.1.2.1 To be designated as a qualified
requirements required by paragraph 9.4.4? representative of the NDT
Level III for the administration
RESPONSE: and grading of NDT Level I and
1. See Inquiry 84-4, response 1 [above]. Inquiry 84-4 addresses Level II personnel qualification
home-study (correspondence) courses, but the response is examinations, the designee
appropriate for both computer and web-based training. should have documented,
appropriate instruction by the
2. See Inquiry 84-4, response 2 [above]. NDT Level III in the proper
administration and grading of
General Comments on Section 7 qualification examinations prior
In the 2006 edition of SNT-TC-1A, the course outlines have to conducting and grading
independent qualification
been moved to another publication, ANSI/ASNT CP-105: Topical
examinations for NDT
Outlines for Qualification of Nondestructive Testing Personnel.
personnel. Additionally, the
Traditionally, both SNT-TC-1A and CP-189 have published the practical examination should
training course outlines as part of the respective documents. By be administered by a person
moving the outlines from SNT-TC-1A and CP-189 and publish- certified in the applicable NDT
ing them in CP-105, the problem of having two sets of outlines method as NDT Level II or III.

15
 |
SECTION I PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

8.1.3 All NDT Level I, II, and III written 8.2.2 Color Contrast Differentiation. The
examinations should be closed- examination should demonstrate
book except that necessary data, the capability of distinguishing and
such as graphs, tables, specifications, differentiating contrast among colors or
procedures, codes, etc., may be provided shades of gray used in the method as
with or in the examination. Questions determined by the employer. This should
utilizing such reference materials be conducted upon initial certification
should require an understanding of the and at five-year intervals thereafter.
information rather than merely locating 8.2.3 Vision examinations expire on the last
the appropriate answer. day of the month of expiration.
8.1.4 For NDT Level I and II personnel, a 8.3 General (Written – for NDT Levels I and II)
composite grade should be determined 8.3.1 The general examinations should
by simple averaging of the results of address the basic principles of the
the general, specific, and practical applicable method.
examinations described below. For 8.3.2 In preparing the examinations, the
NDT Level III personnel, the composite NDT Level III should select or devise
grade should be determined by simple appropriate questions covering the
averaging of the results of the basic, applicable method to the degree
method, and specific examinations required by the employer’s written
described below. practice.
8.1.5 Examinations administered by the 8.3.3 See Appendix A for example questions.
employer for qualification should result 8.3.4 The minimum number of questions that
in a passing composite grade of at should be given is shown in Table 8.3.4.
least 80%, with no individual written 8.3.5 A valid ACCP Level II or ASNT NDT
examination having a passing grade less Level II certificate may be accepted as
than 70%. The practical examination fulfilling the general examination criteria
should have a passing grade of at least for each applicable method if the NDT
80%. Level III has determined that the ASNT
8.1.6 When an examination is administered examinations meet the requirements of
and graded for the employer by an the employer’s written practice.
outside agency and the outside agency 8.4 Specific (Written – for NDT Levels I and II)
issues grades of pass or fail only, on a 8.4.1 The specific examination should address
certified report, then the employer may the equipment, operating procedures,
accept the pass grade as 80% for that and NDT techniques that the individual
particular examination. may encounter during specific
8.1.7 The employer who purchases outside assignments to the degree required by
services is responsible for ensuring the employer’s written practice.
that the examination services meet the 8.4.2 The specific examination should also
requirements of the employer’s written cover the specifications or codes
practice. and acceptance criteria used in the
8.1.8 In no case shall an examination be employer’s NDT procedures.
administered by one’s self or by a 8.4.3 The minimum number of questions that
subordinate. should be given is shown in Table 8.3.4.
8.2 Vision Examinations 8.5 Practical (for NDT Level I and II)
8.2.1 Near-Vision Acuity. The examination 8.5.1 The candidate should demonstrate
should ensure natural or corrected familiarity with and ability to operate the
near-distance acuity in at least one eye necessary NDT equipment, record, and
such that the applicant is capable of analyze the resultant information to the
reading a minimum of Jaeger Number 2 degree required.
or equivalent type and size letter at the 8.5.2 At least one flawed specimen or
distance designated on the chart but not component should be tested and the
less than 12 in. (30.5 cm) on a standard results of the NDT analyzed by the
Jaeger test chart. The ability to perceive candidate.
an Ortho-Rater minimum of 8 or similar
test pattern is also acceptable. This
should be administered annually.
TA BLE 8.3. 4

Minimum Number of Examination Questions

General Specific
Method/Technique
Level I Level II Level I Level II

Acoustic Emission Testing 40 40 20 20

Electromagnetic Testing
Alternating Current Field Measurement 40 40 20 20
Eddy Current Testing 40 40 20 20
Remote Field Testing 30 30 20 20
Ground Penetrating Radar 30 40 20 20
Guided Wave Testing 40 40 20 20
Laser Methods Testing
Profilometry 30 30 20 20
Holography/Shearography 30 30 20 20
Leak Testing
Bubble Leak Testing 20 20 15 15
Pressure Change Leak Testing 20 20 15 15
Halogen Diode Leak Testing 20 20 15 15
Mass Spectrometer Leak Testing 20 20 20 40
Liquid Penetrant Testing 40 40 20 20
Magnetic Flux Leakage Testing 20 20 20 15
Magnetic Particle Testing 40 40 20 20
Microwave Technology Testing 40 40 20 20
Neutron Radiographic Testing 40 40 20 20
Radiographic Testing
Radiography 40 40 20 20

Radiographic Film Interpretation –

40 20
Non-Radiographer

Radiographic Film Interpretation –

20 15
Radiographer (Certified RT NDT Level I)

Computed Radiography 40 40 20 20
Computed Tomography 40 40 20 20
Digital Radiography 40 40 20 20
Thermal/Infrared Testing 40 20
Building Diagnostics 50 40
Electrical and Mechanical Testing 50 40
Materials Testing 50 40
Ultrasonic Testing 40 40 20 20
Full Matrix Capture 40 30
Phased Array Ultrasonic Testing 40 30
Time of Flight Diffraction 40 30

Digital Thickness Measurement

20 10
(numeric output only)

A-scan Thickness Measurement 30 15

Vibration Analysis 40 40 20 60
Visual Testing 40 40 20 20

17
 |
SECTION I PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

8.5.2.1 Phased Array and Time of examination. The candidate should detect
Flight Diffraction Practical all discontinuities and conditions specified
Examination. Flawed samples by the NDT Level III. The written practice
used for practical examinations should address detection rates as well as the
should be representative maximum number of false calls acceptable.
of the components and/ An example of a practical examination
or configurations that the checklist is attached as Appendix B to this
candidates would be testing Recommended Practice. The example
under this endorsement and checklist has been provided as guidance on
approved by the NDT Level III. development of practical examinations for
8.5.2.2 For Film Interpretation any method or level.
Limited Certification, the
practical examination should Note: While it is normal to score the practical on
consist of review and grading a percentile basis, practical examinations should
of a sufficient number of contain checkpoints that failure to successfully
radiographs to demonstrate complete will result in failure of the examination.
satisfactory performance to the 8.6 Sample questions for general examinations are
satisfaction of the NDT Level III. presented in the separate question booklets that
The number of radiographs can be obtained from the ASNT International
should be addressed in the Service Center. These questions are intended as
employer’s written practice. examples only and should not be used verbatim
8.5.3 The description of the specimen, the for qualification examinations. The following
NDT procedure, including checkpoints, ASNT Questions & Answers Books are available
and the results of the examination should from ASNT:
be documented.
8.5.4 NDT Level I Practical Examination.
Test Method Question
Proficiency should be demonstrated in
Booklets
performing the applicable NDT technique
Acoustic Emission Testing G
on one or more specimens or machine
Electromagnetic Testing E
problems approved by the NDT Level
1. Alternating Current Field
III and in evaluating the results to the
Measurement EA
degree of responsibility as described in
2. Eddy Current Testing EE
the employer’s written practice. At least
3. Remote Field Testing ER
10 different checkpoints requiring an
Ground Penetrating Radar GP*
understanding of test variables and the
Guided Wave Testing GW*
employer’s procedural requirements
Laser Testing
should be included in this practical
1. Profilometry LP*
examination. The candidate should
2. Holography/Shearography LH*
detect all discontinuities and conditions
Leak Testing
specified by the NDT Level III. The written
1. Bubble Leak Testing HB
practice should address detection rates as
2. Pressure Change Measurement
well as the maximum number of false calls
Testing HP
acceptable.
3. Halogen Diode Leak Testing HH
4. Mass Spectrometer Leak Testing HM
Note: While it is normal to score the
Liquid Penetrant Testing D
practical on a percentile basis, practical
Magnetic Flux Leakage Testing MF
examinations should contain checkpoints
Magnetic Particle Testing B
that failure to successfully complete will
Microwave Technology Testing MWV*
result in failure of the examination.
Neutron Radiographic Testing F
8.5.5 NDT Level II Practical Examination. Radiographic Testing
Proficiency should be demonstrated in 1. Radiography A
selecting and performing the applicable 2. Computed Radiography AA*
NDT technique within the method and 3. Computed Tomography AB*
interpreting and evaluating the results 4. Digital Radiography AC*
on one or more specimens or machine Thermal/Infrared Testing J
problems approved by the NDT Level III. Ultrasonic Testing C
At least 10 different checkpoints requiring Vibration Analysis K*
an understanding of NDT variables and Visual Testing I
the employer’s procedural requirements
should be included in this practical *In course of preparation
8.7 NDT/PdM Level III Examinations 8.7.2.3 Twenty questions relating
8.7.1 Basic Examinations to capability for interpreting
8.7.1.1 NDT Basic Examination codes, standards, and
(need not be retaken to add specifications relating to the
another test method as long method.
as the candidate holds a 8.7.3 Specific Examination (for each method).
current Level III certificate or 8.7.3.1 Twenty questions
certification). The minimum relating to specifications,
number of questions that equipment, techniques, and
should be given is as follows: procedures applicable to
8.7.1.1.1 Fifteen questions re- the employer’s product(s)
lating to understand- and methods employed and
ing the SNT-TC-1A to the administration of the
document employer’s written practice.
8.7.1.1.2 Twenty questions 8.7.4 A valid endorsement on an ASNT NDT
relating to applicable Level III certificate or ACCP Professional
materials, fabrica- Level III certificate fulfills the examination
tion, and product criteria described in 8.7.1 and 8.7.2 for
technology. each applicable NDT method.
8.7.1.1.3 Twenty questions 8.8 Reexamination
that are similar to 8.8.1 Those failing to attain the required
published NDT grades should wait at least 30 days or
Level II questions for receive suitable additional training as
other appropriate determined by the NDT Level III before
NDT methods. reexamination.
8.7.1.2 PdM Basic Examination
(need not be retaken to add
another test method as long Inquiries for Section 8
as the candidate holds a
current Level III certificate or INQUIRY 78-1
certification). The minimum
If a Level II examination is administered to a Level I individ-
number of questions that
ual, is there a need, when that individual is eligible for Level II
should be given is as follows:
certification, to readminister the same Level II examination
8.7.1.2.1 Fifteen questions re-
lating to understand- provided that all other criteria, for example, education, training,
ing the SNT-TC-1A and experience, have been satisfied?
document.
8.7.1.2.2 Twenty questions RESPONSE:
relating to applicable It is not intended that the individual should be reexamined,
machinery technology. provided that the original Level II examination was passed and
8.7.1.2.3 Thirty questions all applicable requirements of the employer’s written practice
that are similar to have been met per paragraph 8.1 of SNT-TC-1A.
published NDT
Level II questions for INQUIRY 79-2
other appropriate
Since NDT Level III general examination questions in some
PdM methods.
8.7.2 Method Examination (for each method). methods are available from ASNT [see the table under para-
8.7.2.1 Thirty questions relating to graph 8.6 in the 2020 edition], is it intended that the Level III
fundamentals and principles questions … be selected from those published by ASNT?
that are similar to published
ASNT NDT Level III questions RESPONSE:
for each method, and It is intended that the recommended 30 questions devised
8.7.2.2 Fifteen questions relating to by the examiner for the appropriate method [of the NDT
application and establishment Level III method examination] be devised or selected as appro-
of techniques and procedures
priate to the degree required by the employer’s written practice.
that are similar to the published
As with all questions and answers provided by ASNT, those
ASNT NDT Level III questions
mentioned are suggested as guidelines and supplied as an aid
for each method, and
to employers in preparing examinations. … The additional
30 questions [20 questions in the 2020 edition] from Level II

19
 |
SECTION I PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

questions for other applicable NDT methods as recommended RESPONSE:

in paragraph 8.5.3(a) [8.7.1.1.3 in the 2020 edition] are intended No. See Inquiry 99-3.
to be selected from methods other than that for which the can-
didate is being examined. It is intended that the employer use NOTE TO THE INQUIRER:

such questions to determine that the candidate has sufficient The SNT-TC-1A Interpretation Panel reviewed this question
knowledge of other NDT methods that might be applicable to and agreed with the original response.
the employer’s particular circumstances. For example, it could
INQUIRY 08-2
be appropriate that a candidate being examined for Level III
qualification in a particular method be required to demonstrate Per the 2001 edition of SNT-TC-1A, a Level II examiner is
basic knowledge in one or more other methods in order to “des- certified in PT, MT, and VT and has been approved as capable of
ignate the particular test method and technique to be used.” distinguishing and differentiating contrast among colors accord-
ing to Ishihara standard plates, as determined by the written
INQUIRY 79-13 practice. Does this person also require approval by a shades
If an employee performs NDT to multiple codes, specifi- of gray acuity examination to be qualified in RT to meet the
cations, and acceptance standards, is it necessary to include requirements of paragraph 8.2.2?
questions relating to each code, specification, or acceptance
standard in this specific examination? RESPONSE:

Yes. … Paragraph 8.2.2 allows the employer to determine the

RESPONSE: method of testing for color differentiation or gray shade differ-
It is the intent of paragraph 8.2(c2) [8.4.2 in the 2020 edition] entiation. Whether to test for color differentiation or gray shade
that the specific examination cover all codes, specifications, and differentiation is determined by which is appropriate for the
acceptance standards applicable to the employee’s activities. method the individual is being certified in.

INQUIRY 80-2 INQUIRY 10-4

In reference to the practical examination, there are several May an employer appoint directly an “EN 473 Level III” as
approaches that may be taken. For example, grades on check- employer’s NDT Level III after defined in employer’s written
points could be given as 1 (correct) or 0 (incorrect) or could be practice to sign the certificates according to SNT-TC-1A in order
given in a graduated fashion, say from 0 to 5, depending on the to verify qualification of candidate for certification?
correctness and efficiency of the application. Which approach is
correct? Could a questionnaire for which written answers would RESPONSE:

be prepared as an alternative method of grading be used? The employer may use the examination results that they
have determined meet the requirement of the written practice.
RESPONSE: As stated in SNT-TC-1A, paragraph 8.1.5 [8.1.7 in the 2020
Please refer to paragraphs 8.5.1(c) and 9.6.1(f) [8.5.4 and edition], the employer is responsible for ensuring the examina-
9.4.8, respectively, in the 2020 edition]. Either of the proposed tion services meet the requirements of the employer’s written
grading methods is permissible depending on the needs of the practice. Certification can only be issued when it has been
employer. Other approaches may also be taken. The approach determined that all the requirements of the employer’s written
which meets the needs of the employer should be described in practice have been met.
the written practice and followed for the practical examination.
INQUIRY 14-7
The last technique proposing a questionnaire for which written
answers would be prepared would fall more appropriately Regarding paragraph 8.2 of SNT-TC-1A (2011), who may be
under the specific examination category. responsible to carry out the vision acuity examination? We have
in our written practice three possible options:
INQUIRY 99-3
1. Performed by a nurse and approved by an NDT Level III; or
Is it the intent of SNT-TC-1A that any composite examina-
2. Performed by an ophthalmologist and approved by an NDT
tion grade less than 80% should be considered a failing grade?
Level III; or
RESPONSE: 3. Performed by the NDT Level III.
Yes. Are all correct?

INQUIRY 05-1 RESPONSE:

Paragraph 8.1.3 states, “Examinations administered for qual- SNT-TC-1A does not address who should conduct the visual
ification should result in a passing grade of at least 80%,” but examination. All three of the options would be acceptable if
if the employer’s written practice states that each examination addressed in the written practice.
must achieve 70% or more, and does not require an 80% com-
posite, is this acceptable?
INQUIRY 14-10
9.4.1 Name of certified individual.
According to SNT-TC-1A (2011), if a person is being qualified 9.4.2 Level of certification, NDT method and/or
directly to Level II, do they need to take both the Level I and technique, as applicable, and limitations
Level II examinations, or can that person take just the (if any), as applicable.
Level II examinations? 9.4.3 Educational background and experience
of certified individuals.
RESPONSE: 9.4.4 Statement indicating satisfactory
completion of training in accordance
Only the examinations for the level of certification being with the employer’s written practice.
sought are required. 9.4.5 Results of the vision examinations
prescribed in 8.2 for the current
INQUIRY 17-7
certification period.
Is it the intent of paragraphs 8.5.4 and 8.5.5 that the candi- 9.4.6 Current examination copy(ies) or
date has failed the examination if the candidate does not detect evidence of successful completion of
all discontinuities specified as mandatory and conditions speci- examinations.
fied by the NDT Level III? 9.4.7 Composite grade(s) or suitable evidence
of grades.
RESPONSE: 9.4.8 Signature of the NDT Level III that
verified qualifications of candidate for
Yes, if specified as mandatory by the NDT Level III.
certification.
9.4.9 Dates of certification and/or
General Comments on Section 8 recertification.
In the 2011 edition of SNT-TC-1A, provisions were included 9.4.10 Certification expiration date.
to designate qualified individuals to administer and grade exam- 9.4.11 Signature of employer’s certifying
inations. Such designations must be documented. authority.
Also in the 2011 edition, employers were provided the option 9.5 Certification certificates and wallet cards. The
of using an ASNT NDT Level II certificate to satisfy the general following recommendations are considered best
examination requirement. This is an additional option to the practice and should be followed:
ACCP Level II certificate used to satisfy this same requirement 9.5.1 The legal name of the employer should
be clearly identified followed by the
that was added in the 1996 edition of SNT-TC-1A in a 1998
document number and revision/edition
addenda.
number of the written practice.
These changes have been retained in the 2020 edition. 9.5.2 The certificate should indicate “SNT-TC-1A”
followed by the four-digit year of the
Review Questions for Section 8 applicable edition of SNT-TC-1A that the
Based on the foregoing discussion, answer the questions on written practice was developed to follow.
pp. 31–32. 9.5.3 Full legal name of the certified individual
in the ISO basic Latin alphabet.
Additional characters may also be used
Section 9: Certification where customary to accommodate local
Section 9 (pp. 11–12) of SNT-TC-1A (2020) is reprinted below in languages.
9.5.4 Level of certification, NDT method and/or
full:
technique, as applicable and limitations
(if any).
9.0 Certification 9.5.5 Limitations of certification authorization
9.1 Certification of NDT personnel to all levels of should be clearly defined, when
qualification is the responsibility of the employer. appropriate for the employer, which may
9.2 Certification of NDT personnel should be based include restrictions on product forms,
on demonstration of satisfactory qualification in industry sectors, codes, standards, and
accordance with Sections 6, 7, and 8, as described examination procedures.
in the employer’s written practice. 9.5.6 The full printed legal name and signature
9.3 At the option of the employer, an outside agency of both the designated NDT Level III
may be engaged to provide NDT Level III services. that verified the qualifications of the
In such instances, the responsibility of certification candidate for certification and the
of the employees shall be retained by the employer. designated certifying authority when
9.4 Personnel certification records should be the Level III and certifying authority are
maintained on file by the employer for the identified as separate positions in the
duration specified in the employer’s written employer’s written practice.
practice and should include the following:

21
 |
SECTION I PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

9.5.6.1 If applicable, the ASNT issued When the performance of NDT is subcontracted to an
Level III identification number, outside organization and the outside organization is the direct
when either or both of the employer of the individual performing NDT, the outside orga-
signers hold ASNT Level III nization is the “employer” in terms of SNT-TC-1A. Whether
certifications. the outside organization is properly qualifying and certifying
9.5.7 The certificate or wallet card should be
its NDT personnel can only be determined by the purchaser
fully completed at the time of signing
of such outside services and how such determination is made
by the designated NDT Level III and/or
is a contractual matter between the purchaser and the outside
certifying authority so that no fill-in-the-
blank data remains to be completed by organization.
others.
INQUIRY 96-3
9.5.7.1 Changes to certificates or
wallet cards should require that When applying SNT-TC-1A 1992 edition in strict accordance
a new certificate or wallet card with the document, is it ASNT’s interpretation that a Level III
be issued whenever changes or must be examined?
alterations are necessitated.
9.5.8 Dates of certification and expiration. RESPONSE:

No. Certification of all levels of NDT personnel is the

Inquiries for Section 9 responsibility of the employer. It is the intent of ASNT to certify
Level IIIs by examination. However, the employer can specify
INQUIRY 77-10 the requirements for a certification route without examination
What is the intent regarding employers’ attempts to verify an in the employer’s written practice.
individual’s experience and performance with past employers
INQUIRY 13-1
in order to maintain the documentation recommended in para-
graph 9.6.1 [9.4 in the 2020 edition]? Paragraph 9.4.9 of SNT-TC-1A (2006) [paragraph 9.4.8 in the
2020 edition] says, “Signature of the Level III that verified qual-
RESPONSE: ifications of candidate for certification.” If the candidate whose
The specific documentation to be furnished by new employ- qualifications are being verified is an ASNT NDT Level III, must
ees and past employers and the means for obtaining documen- another Level III sign this verification?
tation is referenced in paragraphs 9.6 and 10.2 of SNT-TC-1A
[paragraphs 9.4 and 13.2, respectively, in the 2020 edition]. RESPONSE:

Details should be included in the employer’s written practice. Yes.

INQUIRY 77-12 INQUIRY 15-5

1. Is it intended that an employer may use more than one In the 2006 edition of SNT-TC-1A, in paragraph 9.4.9, for the
outside agency for providing Level III services? purposes of certification by an employer, must a Level III’s qual-
ifications be verified by another Level III prior to certification by
2. Is it intended that an employer may use Level III individuals
the employer?
in their direct employment and also use an outside agency for
Level III services?
RESPONSE:
3. Is it intended that certification examinations may be adminis- The employer’s Level III must have documented verification
tered without direct supervision and monitoring? that their Level III’s qualifications meet the examination require-
ments of SNT-TC-1A. The documented verification should carry
RESPONSE:
the signature of a Level III.
1. There is no intent to restrict the number of outside agencies
from which an employer could use Level III services. INQUIRY 15-9
2. Yes, both the above and this situation may be used under Should certification documents contain dates of assignment
circumstances as described in the employer’s written practice. to NDT as required by paragraph 9.4.10 (2011 edition)?
3. It is not intended that unsupervised examinations be
RESPONSE:
administered.
The intent of “dates of assignment to NDT” in paragraph
NOTE: SNT-TC-1A only provides guidelines for qualification 9.4.10 is that the employer, as a minimum, document the start
and certification of NDT personnel. Outside services referred to and end date of employment assignments that affect the nature
in paragraph 9 are those intended to be used by an employer of the NDT work done by the individual.
only for the purposes of training, examining, or otherwise quali-
fying individuals directly employed by the employer.
General Comments on Section 9 Inquiries for Section 10
Situations arise where employers, for various reasons,
INQUIRY 02-02
must resort to sources outside the employer’s organization to
provide services attendant to training, examination, and other Is it the intent of SNT-TC-1A (2001) paragraph 10.2 to recom-
activities that require qualified NDT personnel to conduct. mend periodic testing with test props with at least one flawed
Some companies cannot afford, or may not have time to specimen or are other means of technical performance evalua-
develop, training sources and examinations to qualify their tion acceptable, for example, monitoring an inspector perform-
NDT personnel. Others simply prefer to contract such services ing an official production inspection?
as needed. For whatever reasons outside services may be
needed or desired, the responses above merely reinforce the RESPONSE:

basic principles underlying SNT-TC-1A: “Certification of all The means for periodic technical performance evaluation
levels of NDT personnel is the complete responsibility of the should be described in the employer’s written practice. Note
employer” and “the employer shall establish written practices that the evaluation of technical performance should consist of
covering all phases of certification including training as speci- not only monitoring the proper application of technique, but
fied in Section 5.” also the ability to recognize relevant indications and evaluate
Inquiries 90-4 and 96-3 address the issue of whether a those indications against the employer’s acceptance criteria.
Level III must take an examination in order to become certi-
INQUIRY 12-9
fied. This is of special note in that versions prior to the 1988
edition clearly permitted examination waivers for the NDT Is it correct that an Authorized Inspector could insist
Level III, leading to the concept of certification by “appoint- the employer must perform hands-on practical examination
ment.” This latter practice has been strongly criticized through- every two years for the Level I and II personnel, in order to
out the industry since it is perceived as a loophole for employ- fulfill the requirements of paragraph 10.2 (periodical technical
ers to certify underqualified individuals to assume the key role performance)?
of administering the NDT activities within an organization. In As an employer, we would state on our written practice that
order to restrict this practice, the 1988 edition of SNT-TC-1A the continuing NDT performance of the Level Is and IIs has
called for Level IIIs to be qualified by examination. But being been satisfied by the client and the appointed Level III, then
a recommended practice that encourages employers to adapt he or she should be evaluated for good technical performance
their respective requirements based on each set of circum- without taking any new hands-on practical examination.
stances, the opportunity still remains open to employers to
“appoint” their Level IIIs, as long as their written practice RESPONSE:

reflects this strategy as one of their permitted options. Additional customer or regulatory requirements are beyond
the scope of Recommended Practice No. SNT-TC-1A.
Review Questions for Section 9
INQUIRY 13-2
Based on the foregoing discussion, answer the questions on
pp. 32–33. In SNT-TC-1A (2011), paragraph 10.2 states, “Periodically, as
defined in the employer’s written practice, NDT Level I and II
personnel should be reevaluated by the NDT Level III adminis-
Section 10: Technical Performance Evaluation
tering a practical examination. The practical examination should
Section 10 (p. 12) of SNT-TC-1A (2020) is reprinted below follow the format and guidelines described in Section 8.5.”
in full: Is it the intent of 10.2 that technical performance review
be performed between certification periods, or is it acceptable
10.0 Technical Performance Evaluation to perform them when a person’s certification comes due for
10.1 NDT personnel may be reexamined anytime at renewal if that is how the evaluation period is defined in the
the discretion of the employer and have their employer’s written practice?
certificates extended or revoked.
10.2 Periodically, as defined in the employer’s written RESPONSE:
practice, NDT Level I and II personnel should be
The intent is that the employer defines in the written
reevaluated by the NDT Level III administering a
practice when the technical performance review will be
practical examination. The practical examination
performed.
should follow the format and guidelines
described in Section 8.5.
General Comments on Section 10
This section was not in editions of SNT-TC-1A before 2001;
however, paragraph 10.1 was addressed in paragraph 9.5(3) of
the 1996 edition. Paragraph 10.2 was added to provide a means
whereby an employer could ensure that certified personnel are

23
 |
SECTION I PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

continuously and satisfactorily performing their responsibilities. Inquiries for Section 12

It is assumed that, should an individual’s performance evalu-
INQUIRY 91-4, QUESTION 2
ation indicate substandard performance, additional training
would be provided and reexamination would be conducted. 2. What constitutes “evidence of continuing satisfactory
performance”?
Review Questions for Section 10
Based on the foregoing discussion, answer the questions on RESPONSE:
pp. 33. 2. The intent of “evidence of continuing satisfactory perfor-
mance” in paragraph 9.7.1 [12.1.1 in the 2020 edition]
Section 11: Interrupted Service of SNT-TC-1A is that the employer shall have objective
evidence of an individual’s satisfactory performance during
Section 11 (p. 12) of SNT-TC-1A (2020) is reprinted below in full: the previous certification period of the appropriate duties
outlined in the employer’s written practice.
11.0 Interrupted Service
11.1 The employer’s written practice should include INQUIRY 03-01
rules covering the types and duration of 1. Regarding SNT-TC-1A (1984) paragraph 9.7.1 [12.1.1 in
interrupted service that requires reexamination
the 2020 edition], what is considered proper “evidence of
and recertification.
continuing satisfactory performance”?
11.2 The written practice should specify the
requirements for reexamination and/or 2. Does this mean the certified individual shall maintain docu-
recertification for the interrupted service. mentation of satisfactory performance?
3. How often should performance be documented?
General Comments on Section 11 4. CP-189 (1991) indicates suspension should occur if duties
This section was not in editions of SNT-TC-1A before 2001; are not performed during any consecutive 12-month period
however, the subject of interrupted services was included in (Section 7.2). Is this implied in SNT-TC-1A?
paragraph 9.5 (Recertification) of the 1996 edition.
RESPONSE:
Review Questions for Section 11 1. Please reference Inquiry 91-4 Question 2 [above].
Based on the foregoing discussion, answer the question on 2. No.
pp. 33.
3. SNT-TC-1A (1984) provides the user sufficient latitude
under paragraph 9.7.1 [12.1.1 in the 2020 edition] to identify
Section 12: Recertification specifically how they would evaluate “evidence of continuing
satisfactory performance.” The requirements should be docu-
Section 12 (p. 12) of SNT-TC-1A (2020) is reprinted below in full:
mented in the employer’s written practice.
4. There are no specific provisions in the [1984 edition of]
12.0 Recertification
12.1 All levels of NDT personnel shall be recertified SNT-TC-1A regarding interruption of NDT duties while
periodically in accordance with one of the continuing to work for the same employer. However, the
following criteria: employer must be satisfied with the proficiency of any indi-
12.1.1 Evidence of continuing satisfactory vidual at any level to handle work tasks. The employer has
technical performance. direct knowledge of the employee’s prior performance and can
12.1.2 Reexamination in those portions of best judge the need for reexamination as a function of duration
the examinations in Section 8 deemed of interrupted NDT service.
necessary by the employer’s NDT Level III.
12.2 The recommended maximum recertification
INQUIRY 04-2
intervals are 5 years for all certification levels.
Certifications expire on the last day of the month 1. Is it the intent of paragraph 12.1.1 that individuals who are
of expiration. recertified based on “continuing satisfactory technical perfor-
12.3 When new techniques are added to the mance” must pass a new practical examination?
employer’s written practice and the NDT Level III
2. May a Level I or II individual be recertified, based on
personnel is assigned to perform examinations
using these new techniques, the NDT Level III “continuing satisfactory technical performance” without
personnel should receive applicable training, take taking a new practical examination?
applicable examinations and obtain the necessary
experience, such that the NDT Level III meets
the requirements of the new techniques in Table
6.3.1.A, prior to their next recertification date, in
the applicable method.
RESPONSE: RESPONSE:
1. No. See Inquiry 91-4, Question 2. The maximum recertification interval shall not exceed 5 years.
2. Yes. SNT-TC-1A provides the user sufficient latitude under The employer’s written practice may specify a shorter period.
paragraph 9.7.1 [12.1.1 in the 2020 edition] to identify specif- INQUIRY 18-11
ically how they would evaluate “evidence of continuing
satisfactory performance.” The requirements should be docu- Our firm provided training to our inspectors according to
mented in the employer’s written practice. SNT-TC-1A (2011 version). It has been 5 years since the certi-
fications were issued to them. Recertification would be neces-
sary now. However, Recommended Practice SNT-TC-1A itself
INQUIRY 13-11 has been updated to the 2016 version. In such a situation, is
Does the technical performance evaluation mentioned in it still valid to reissue certificates to SNT-TC-1A (2011)? Or, are
paragraph 12.1.1 of SNT-TC-1A (2006) refer to the periodic tech- we entitled to issue certificates to SNT-TC-1A (2016) instead? Is
nical performance evaluation as mentioned in paragraph 10.2? there any specific requirement for the inspectors to update from
the 2011 to the 2016 version?
BACKGROUND:

Paragraph 12.1 states that “all levels of NDT personnel shall RESPONSE:

be recertified periodically in accordance with one of the follow- The version utilized by the employer is determined by the
ing criteria...” employer’s written practice unless the purchasing requirements
Paragraph 12.1.1 mentions one of the criteria as “Evidence of indicate otherwise.
continuing satisfactory technical performance.”
General Comments on Section 12
RESPONSE: This section was not in editions of SNT-TC-1A before 2001;
No. Paragraph 10.2 says, “The [technical performance] however, this information was in paragraph 9.5 (Recertification)
evaluation and documentation should follow the format and of the 1996 edition. The only change beginning with the 2006
guidelines described in Section 8.5.” Section 8.5 describes the edition is the change in the recommended maximum certifica-
practical examination. The “continuing satisfactory technical tion interval to five years.
performance” mentioned in 12.1.1 refers to evidence of having
satisfactorily performed those tasks that are relevant to the level Review Question for Section 12
of qualification of the person being evaluated. Based on the foregoing discussion, answer the questions on
p. 33.
INQUIRY 14-1

We engage an outside agency to provide NDT Level III

Section 13: Termination
services. In SNT-TC-1A (2011), paragraph 9.3 states in part that
the responsibility of certification of the employees should be Section 13 (p. 12) of SNT-TC-1A (2020) is reprinted below in full:
retained by the employer. Paragraph 12.1.2 states that reexam-
ination in those portions of the examinations in Section 8 are 13.0 Termination
deemed necessary by the employer’s NDT Level III. 13.1 The employer’s certification shall be deemed
Since we engage the services of an outside agency for revoked when employment is terminated.
Level III, does the outside agency’s Level III determine which 13.2 An NDT Level I, Level II, or Level III whose
portions of the examinations in Section 8 are necessary? certification has been terminated may be certified
to the former NDT level by a new employer
RESPONSE: based on examination, as described in Section 8,
provided all of the following conditions are met to
Yes, as authorized by the contracting employer. the new employer’s satisfaction:
13.2.1 The employee has proof of prior
INQUIRY 18-5
certification.
If a person has previously qualified as NDT Level II that 13.2.2 The employee was working in the
required recertification in according with Recommended Practice capacity to which certified within six
SNT-TC-1A, edition 2016, Section 12.2 (due to certification expi- months of termination.
ration date) to be performed by outside agency and the person 13.2.3 The employee is being recertified within
has met all requirements of continuous performance satisfactory six months of termination.
to the method referred, physical aptitude, level education, formal 13.2.4 Prior to being examined for certification,
employees not meeting the above
training, and experience, and has passed the method examination
requirements should receive additional
then the new recertification interval shall be 5 years (not less)?
training as deemed appropriate by the
NDT Level III.

25
 |
SECTION I PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

Inquiries for Section 13 2. If an employee has been continuously working for another
employer certified in the same capacities, may their certifica-
INQUIRY 78-4 tion(s) be reinstated for the remainder of the original three-
NOTE: This inquiry relates to paragraph 13.2 beginning with year period of certification in accordance with paragraph 9.7
the 2001 edition. [12.0 in the 2020 edition]?
1. Regarding paragraph 10.2 of SNT-TC-1A, does “based on
RESPONSE:
examination” refer to examinations administered during
prior employment or does it refer to new examinations to be 1. The provisions of paragraph 10.2 apply only to a new
administered by the new employer? employer. For this part of the inquiry, the provisions of
paragraph 9.7.3 [11.1 in the 2020 edition] would prevail.
2. An individual can provide evidence of prior certification per
paragraph 10.2(a), but does not meet either paragraphs 10.2(b) 2. For this part of the inquiry, the receiving employer would
or 10.2(c), which recommend that the individual was working be considered a new employer and the provisions of
in the capacity to which he or she had been certified and is paragraph 10.2 would apply. If, however, the employee in
being recertified within six months of their termination. What question was previously employed by the receiving employer,
should be the basis of qualification for such an individual? paragraph 9.7.3 [11.1 in the 2020 edition] would prevail.

RESPONSE:
General Comments on Section 14
1. It is intended that the examination referred to in
This section was not in editions of SNT-TC-1A before 2001.
paragraph 10.2 be administered by the new employer.
This section was added to establish the guidelines for rein-
2. It is intended that an individual who has neither worked in the statement of an individual’s certification that has been termi-
capacity to which previously certified in the past six months nated. This specifically relates to a former employee, not a new
nor is being recertified within six months should have addi- employee (see paragraph 13.2). This would cover those situa-
tional training and experience prior to recertification. The tions where a certified employee had their certification termi-
employer’s written practice should detail such provisions. nated or suspended due to a temporary layoff, or a temporary
non-NDT job assignment.
Review Questions for Section 13 NOTE: There are no review questions for Section 14.
Based on the foregoing discussion, answer the questions on
pp. 34.
Section 15: Referenced Publications
Section 15 (p. 13) of SNT-TC-1A (2020) is reprinted below in full:
Section 14: Reinstatement
Section 14 (p. 13) of SNT-TC-1A (2020) is reprinted below 15.0 Referenced Publications
in full: 15.1 The following documents contain provisions
which, through reference in this text, constitute
14.0 Reinstatement provisions of this Recommended Practice. Copies
14.1 An NDT Level I, Level II, or Level III whose may be obtained from The American Society
certification has been terminated may be reinstated for Nondestructive Testing Inc., PO Box 28518,
to the former NDT level, without a new examination, Columbus, OH 43228-0518, USA.
provided all of the following conditions are met: 15.1.1 ANSI/ASNT CP-105: ASNT Standard
14.1.1 The employer has maintained the Topical Outlines for Qualification of
personnel certification records required Nondestructive Testing Personnel, latest
in Section 9.4. edition.
14.1.2 The employee’s certification did not 15.1.2 ASNT Central Certification Program,
expire during termination. ASNT Document CP-1, latest edition.
14.1.3 The employee is being reinstated within 15.1.3 ASNT Policy G-14 - Use of the ASNT
six months of termination. Name and ASNT Marks, latest edition.
15.2 The following document contains specific NDT
terms which, though referenced in this text,
Inquiries for Section 14 constitute provisions of this Recommended
Practice. Copies may be obtained from ASTM
INQUIRY 78-10 International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box
C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, USA.
NOTE: This inquiry relates to paragraph 14.0 beginning with 15.2.1 ASTM E 1316 (latest edition) - Standard
the 2001 edition. Terminology for Nondestructive
1. When an employee returns to work for a former employer Examinations, Section A – Common NDT
where he or she was certified, may this employee’s certifica- Terms.
tion(s) be reinstated without examination if the provisions of
paragraphs 10.2(b) and 10.2(c) are met? NOTE: There are no review questions for Section 15.
REVIEW QUESTIONS

Sections 1, 2, and 3

1. Which of the following statements is true concerning the 5. SNT-TC-1A is intended as a guideline for employers:
usage of SNT-TC-1A?
a. to establish their own written practice that must be
a. SNT-TC-1A is intended for use by a limited set of used as a strict specification.
industrial segments. b. to establish their own written practice for the
b. SNT-TC-1A was generated to satisfy the specification qualification and certification of their NDT
requirements of ASME. personnel.
c. SNT-TC-1A was last revised in 1988. c. to define training course requirements for contractors
d. SNT-TC-1A is not intended to be used as a strict performing outside training services.
specification. d. who are corporate members of ASNT.

2. The SNT-TC-1A Interpretation Panel will respond to 6. The following is a statement in SNT-TC-1A: “It is
inquiries about SNT-TC-1A. The inquiry must be: recognized that these guidelines may not be appropriate
for certain employers, circumstances, and/or
a. written and stated in general terms. applications.” What should be done if the guidelines are
b. written including specific details of the case, such as not appropriate?
names, places, dates, and other pertinent facts.
a. The employer must change its operations to conform
c. considered by the ASNT Board of Directors if it
to the guidelines.
involves decisions that would place ASNT in a
position between buyer and seller. b. The employer must seek relief from ASNT for
inappropriate applications.
d. ruled upon by the Technical and Education Council
of ASNT before the SNT-TC-1A Interpretation Panel c. The employer should review the detailed
prepares a response. recommendations and modify them, as necessary,
to meet its particular needs with justification
3. Which of the following statements is true? documented in an annex to the written practice.
d. The employer shall submit an inquiry in writing
a. ASNT has been providing certification examinations directed to the SNT-TC-1A Interpretation Panel.
for Level III personnel since the late 1960s.
b. SNT-TC-1A was first published in the late 1960s. 7. Which of the following statements is true?
c. SNT-TC-1A requires that Level III personnel be
a. Qualification is the sum total of training and
qualified and certified by ASNT.
experience.
d. SNT-TC-1A was developed to satisfy requirements for
b. The employer may not certify Level III personnel.
NDT personnel qualification and certification set forth
in parts of the ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code. c. A certifying agency is any organization used by an
employer in training NDT personnel.
4. With regard to the training of NDT personnel, the d. Certification is written testimony of qualification.
employer:
8. Who should be responsible to assess whether or not an
a. must conduct all of the training on the premises. individual should be qualified and certified who does not
b. may engage an outside service who must conduct the perform NDT, but monitors and evaluates NDT?
training on the employer’s premises.
a. ASNT.
c. should not conduct the training, being too close to
the company’s problems. b. The individual’s employer.
d. may engage an outside service but is, nevertheless, c. A government regulatory agency.
responsible for the certification of the company’s d. The customer’s auditor.
NDT personnel.

27
 |
SECTION I PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

9. In SNT-TC-1A (2020) holographic testing is a technique Section 4

under which of the following NDT methods?

a. Visual testing. 14. The basic levels of qualification recommended by

b. Guided wave testing. SNT-TC-1A are:
c. Acoustic emission testing.
a. trainee, Level I, Level II, and Level III.
d. Laser testing.
b. trainee, apprentice, Level I, Level II, and Level III.
c. Level I, Level II, and Level III.
10. ASNT intended that the recommendations of SNT-TC-1A
be applied: d. Level I, Level II, Level III, and instructor.

a. with flexibility and reason. 15. Should personnel who operate ultrasonic digital thickness
b. precisely as written. measurement equipment be qualified and certified?
c. as minimum requirements.
a. Yes, because SNT-TC-1A requires that all personnel
d. as maximum requirements. performing NDT be qualified and certified.
b. No, because SNT-TC-1A does not cover that specific
11. Of the following, which is most appropriate to determine operation.
the needs to qualify and certify personnel whose only
c. Only if required by industry codes, standards, and
NDT function is to operate digital thickness equipment?
specifications.
a. ASNT. d. Whether any NDT personnel should be qualified
b. ASME. and certified depends solely upon the needs of the
employer and the requirements of the employer’s
c. The employer.
customers or clientele.
d. The customer.
16. According to the recommendations of SNT-TC-1A, which
12. Certification is: of the following is true concerning a trainee’s activities?
a. the skill, training, and experience required for a. The trainee may not conduct nondestructive tests
personnel to properly perform the duties of a specific independently and may not report test results.
job.
b. The trainee may not conduct nondestructive tests
b. written testimony of qualification. independently, but may interpret test results if acting
c. intended to be conferred by an organization under written instructions.
independent from the employer. c. The trainee should work along with a certified
d. intended to be conferred by an organization hired by individual and may be considered a Level I, provided
the employer. that the certified individual cosigns any test reports.
d. Once the trainee has worked along with a certified
13. Use of SNT-TC-1A is mandatory when: individual, the trainee may then independently
perform any activities as directed by the certified
a. the material being tested is for a US Air Force
individual.
contract.
b. the material being tested is for a US Navy contract. 17. According to SNT-TC-1A (2020), which of the following is
c. it has been specified by the customer. mandatory for certification of a Level III?
d. the material being tested is for a US Army contract
that requires certification of NDT personnel. a. Shall be capable of assisting in establishment of
acceptance criteria.
b. Shall meet the requirements of the employer’s written
practice.
c. Shall be familiar with other commonly used NDT
methods.
d. Shall be capable of establishing techniques and
selecting test methods.
18. According to written instructions, an NDT Level I may: 22. As recommended in SNT-TC-1A, a Level II:

a. develop and establish techniques. a. may conduct on-the-job training and guidance
b. perform specific calibrations, specific nondestructive of Level I personnel, with the Level I training and
tests, and specific evaluations. guiding trainees.
c. perform ultrasonic phased array tests. b. is responsible for the training and examination of
Level I personnel for certification.
d. provide direction to trainees and other Level I
personnel. c. must be capable of and responsible for establishing
techniques.
19. May a Level I independently perform, evaluate, and sign d. may conduct on-the-job training and guidance of
for results of nondestructive tests with supervision and Level I personnel.
guidance from a Level II or III?
23. According to SNT-TC-1A, which of the following is true for
a. Yes, the intent in SNT-TC-1A is that the Level I may a Level III?
perform the above functions provided that they
are in accordance with written instruction of a a. A Level III must have successfully completed at least
Level II or III. two years of science or engineering study at a college
b. No, the Level I may perform the above functions in or university.
accordance with written procedures, but must be b. It is desirable that a Level III be a registered
under constant supervision and guidance of a Level II professional engineer.
or Level III. c. The Level III is responsible for establishing all
c. No, the Level I may not sign for test results. acceptance criteria.
d. No, the Level I is not allowed to take any independent d. The Level III shall be capable of evaluating test results
action. in terms of codes, standards, and specifications.

20. Which of the following statements is true concerning the

definitions of trainee, Level I, II, and III in SNT-TC-1A?
Section 5

a. The qualifications for Level III equal and exceed

24. In accordance with SNT-TC-1A, who is responsible
those of Level II.
for establishing a written practice for the control and
b. SNT-TC-1A was intended for use by employers to administration of NDT personnel training, examination,
determine the proficiency of individuals at each level. and certification?
c. Except for a provision for a trainee, Levels I, II, and
III may not be further subdivided. Level IIIs may not a. The NDT Level III.
perform Level II functions unless they pass Level II b. The employer.
examinations. c. ASNT.
d. A trainee may perform all of the functions of a Level I d. An appropriate regulatory authority.
if following written instructions.
25. The responsibility of each level of certification for
21. Which of the following is within the scope of activities of a determining the acceptability of materials or components:
Level II individual, as recommended in SNT-TC-1A?
a. need not be described in the employer’s written
a. Calibrate equipment. practice since those responsibilities are defined
b. Establish techniques. specifically in SNT-TC-1A.
c. Standardize equipment. b. should be described in the employer’s written
d. Administer and score exams. practice only if they are different from SNT-TC-1A
recommendations.
c. should be described in the employer’s written
practice under all circumstances.
d. should be described in the employer’s written
practice if dictated by customer requirements.

29
 |
SECTION I PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

30. It is recommended that the education and experience of a

Section 6 Level III candidate include:

a. graduation from a four-year university or college

26. What factors are to be considered to ensure that a
with a degree in engineering or science, plus
candidate for certification in NDT understands the
one additional year of experience beyond the
principles and procedures involved?
Level II requirements, with that assignment being
a. Training, experience, and education. comparable to that of an NDT Level II in the
applicable method.
b. Training, experience, and prior certifications held.
b. graduation from a four-year college or university with
c. Education, experience, and percentage of time on the
a degree in NDT plus three months’ experience in
job doing NDT.
NDT comparable to that of a Level II.
d. Training, experience, and professional credentials.
c. two years’ experience in NDT comparable to that of a
Level II if a high school graduate.
27. As recommended in SNT-TC-1A, which of the following is
true? d. six years’ experience in NDT if the candidate did not
graduate from high school.
a. Overtime cannot be considered in meeting the
minimum experience. 31. Records substantiating training and experience for
b. Overtime can only be considered if the candidate qualification are recommended to be kept on a(n):
is being qualified in more than one method
a. daily or weekly basis.
simultaneously.
b. hourly basis.
c. Overtime can be credited based on total hours.
c. fractional yearly basis.
d. SNT-TC-1A does not currently provide a
recommendation regarding overtime. d. fractional hourly basis.

28. High school education is recommended as a minimum 32. For a person being qualified directly to Level II with no
requirement for: time at Level I, the recommended experience consists of:

a. Level III only. a. the time recommended for Level II.

b. Level II and Level III only. b. the time recommended for Level III.
c. none of the levels. c. the sum of the times recommended for Level I and
Level II.
d. all three levels.
d. not less than six months for any method.
29. In leak testing, recommended work time experience and
training: 33. In some cases, the training times recommended for Level I
are greater than for Level II. Why?
a. differ for each of four major techniques.
a. In preparing for qualification at Level I, the candidate
b. do not consider different techniques.
should always receive more training than for Level II,
c. are listed for Levels II and III only. regardless of the NDT method.
d. are significantly greater than for ultrasonic testing. b. Some numbers in the table are erroneous.
c. Candidates for Level II generally have more formal
education than those for Level I.
d. Some methods require more initial training at
Level I because of differences in complexity and
manipulative skills.
34. The recommended number of training hours in a Section 8
particular method are:
39. In accordance with SNT-TC-1A, the NDT Level III should
a. listed as a function of the candidate’s education.
be responsible for:
b. the same regardless of the candidate’s education.
c. listed as a function of the candidate’s experience. a. ensuring Level II personnel examine Level I
d. reduced if the candidate is being qualified in more personnel.
than one method simultaneously. b. interpretation of all test results obtained by Level II
personnel.
c. all questions to be used on examinations for Level I
Section 7 and Level II.
d. writing all company standard operating procedures.

35. It is recommended that a training program for

40. Which of the following may conduct and grade
qualification and certification purposes should include:
examinations for Level I and Level II personnel?
a. one-on-one practical instruction by the Level III.
a. An NDT Level II.
b. training applicable to all industries where the method
b. A qualified representative of the NDT Level III.
is used.
c. ASNT personnel because they offer examinations on
c. examinations to verify that the training material has
a regular basis.
been comprehended.
d. The company president.
d. a practical examination to verify that the training
material has been comprehended.
41. How often should the near-vision acuity examination be
administered?
36. Recommended training course outlines:
a. Semiannually.
a are included in CP-105 and must not be modified.
b. At five-year intervals.
b. are included in the most recent editions
of SNT-TC-1A. c. Annually.
c. are not available for visual and leak testing. d. Once only, upon initial certification.
d. are included in CP-105 for the methods listed.
42. As recommended in SNT-TC-1A, physical examination
requirements are intended to be:
37. Recommended training reference material:
a. the same for all methods.
a. is available only through ASNT.
b. the same for all employers.
b. is available from a variety of sources.
c. related to each employer’s specific needs.
c. can only include those references listed in CP-105.
d. as specified in applicable sections of the ASME Boiler
d. must be made available to each trainee.
& Pressure Vessel Code.

38. The recommended training course outline includes:

43. The General examination is intended to cover:
a. technical principles of the method.
a. basic test principles of the method.
b. review of API 1104 requirements.
b. only the material included in the training course
c. review of ASTM guidelines.
outlines of SNT-TC-1A.
d. review of interpretation requirements in ASME B31.3.
c. the equipment operational capabilities of the
candidate.
d. the operating procedures that the candidate may
encounter in the job.

31
 |
SECTION I PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

44. Questions and answers available from ASNT are intended 49. For Level I and Level II Practical examinations, one
for use in compiling: or more test specimens are recommended, and the
examinee should perform tests and evaluations
a. the General examination only. using the appropriate equipment and test specimens.
b. the Specific, General, and Practical examinations. The minimum number of different checkpoints
c. the Basic and method examinations. recommended is:
d. the General, Basic, and method examinations.
a. 5.
b. 10.
45. Which of the following parts of Level I and Level II
examinations should be written? c. 15.
d. 20.
a. The General and Specific examinations.
b. The General and Practical examinations. 50. For Level I and II examinations, the recommended
c. The General, Specific, and Practical examinations. minimum composite score is:
d. Only the General examination.
a. 60%.
b. 90%.
46. The Practical examination is recommended to include
operational familiarity with test equipment and analysis c. 70%.
of test results for: d. 80%.

a. Levels I, II, and III. 51. For Level III Basic examinations, it is recommended that
b. Levels I and II. Level II questions also be included. These questions
c. Levels II and III. should be:
d. trainee, Level I, and Level II.
a. Level II questions based on other applicable NDT
methods.
47. Which of the following statements is true with regard to
b. based on Level II tasks for the particular method
the administration of written examinations?
examination.
a. The examinee should not be permitted access to any c. selected at random from questions previously used
reference material. on Level II examinations.
b. Reference data may be supplied for the Practical d. given only if the candidate is being examined in more
examination only. than one method.
c. Level III personnel should be required to memorize
everything except codes, specifications, and
procedures. Section 9
d. Codes, specifications, and procedures may be
provided to examinees for reference during 52. If an outside agency is engaged to provide Level III
examinations provided that they do not contain data services, the:
that can be used to answer questions in the General
examination. a. written practice of the outside agency pertains, and
it is not necessary for the employer that uses the
48. For the written examinations, tables, graphs, and charts outside services to have a written practice.
may be used: b. responsibility of certification must be retained by the
employer utilizing outside services.
a. only during Level I examinations.
c. employer utilizing outside services must nonetheless
b. only during Level II examinations.
have a Level III in direct employment.
c. during all examinations.
d. outside agency may certify the personnel of the
d. only for the Level II Practical examination. employer utilizing outside services.
53. What purpose is best served by maintaining certification Section 11
records and the written practice?

a. Periodic approval by ASNT. 58. Regarding personnel service, SNT-TC-1A (2020) states:
b. To determine the effectiveness of outside services. a. if Level I or Level II personnel service is interrupted
c. To provide documentation for review by customers, by more than three months, they must recertify by
clients, and regulatory agencies. examination.
d. To protect against product liability claims. b. if Level I or Level II personnel service is interrupted
by more than three months (except for military
54. The employer is responsible for certification of: duty or maternity leave), they must recertify by
examination.
a. Level I and Level II NDT personnel.
c. if Level I or Level II personnel service is interrupted
b. Level III personnel only. by more than six months, they must recertify by
c. outside services. examination.
d. all levels of NDT personnel. d. the employer’s written practice should include rules
covering the types and duration of interrupted service
55. The employer can consider an individual to be qualified to that requires reexamination and recertification.
Level III, but only if he or she:

a. takes a comprehensive written examination.

b. has in excess of five years’ experience comparable to
Section 12
a Level II.
c. meets the requirements of the employer’s written 59. Which of the following statements is true concerning
practice. recertification?
d. has taken the ASNT NDT Level III Basic examination
and at least one of the method examinations. a. Recertification can be accomplished only by
reexamination at least once every three years.
b. Recertification can be based upon evidence of
continuing satisfactory performance.
Section 10
c. Once certified to a particular level, certification
can only be terminated if the certified individual
56. According to SNT-TC-1A (2020), the employer shall: terminates employment with the certifying employer.
d. Reexamination of a certified individual can be
a. reexamine Level I and Level II personnel annually.
accomplished only after three years at a particular
b. reexamine Level I and Level II personnel every two
level.
years.
c. reexamine Level I and Level II personnel every five 60. According to SNT-TC-1A (2020), when a new technique
years. is added to the employer’s written practice, the NDT
d. reexamine Level I and Level II personnel anytime at Level III personnel:
the discretion of the employer.
a. may be “grandfathered” into the technique.
57. The technical performance evaluation: b. should first meet the requirements of Level II before
being certified as a Level III in the new technique.
a. must be performed at the mid-point of the
c. should be qualified to the new technique in
certification interval.
accordance with the employer’s written practice.
b. consists of a practical examination following the
d. should receive applicable training, take applicable
format and guidelines of the practical examination
examinations, and obtain the necessary experience,
used for initial qualification.
such that the NDT Level III meets the requirements of
c. is not required if the performance of Level II duties the new techniques in Table 6.3.1A, prior to their next
has been satisfactory over the current certification recertification date, in the applicable method.
period.
d. may be performed on actual product during the
course of normal testing.

33
 |
SECTION I PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

Section 13 62. A certified Level III individual terminates their

employment with employer A and is immediately
61. Automatic termination of certification is recommended employed by employer B. Employer B may certify the
when the certified individual: individual as Level III based upon which of the following?

a. terminates employment with the employer where a. The employer must examine the individual if he or
certified. she has not been working as a Level III during the
past six months.
b. is temporarily assigned to a different job function.
b. The employer may recertify the individual to Level III,
c. takes a leave of absence greater than 30 days.
but only after six months of satisfactory service.
d. achieves a higher level of certification.
c. The employer must examine the individual.
d. The employer may certify the individual to Level III in
accordance with the written practice.

ANSWERS
1d 2a 3b 4d 5b 6c 7d 8b 9d 10a 11c 12b 13c 14c
15d 16a 17b 18b 19a 20a 21c 22d 23d 24b 25c 26a 27d 28c
29a 30a 31b 32c 33d 34b 35c 36d 37b 38a 39c 40b 41c 42c
43a 44d 45a 46b 47d 48c 49b 50d 51a 52b 53c 54d 55c 56d
57b 58d 59b 60d 61a 62c
CHAPTER 2

ANSI/ASNT CP-189 (2020)

1.5 The use of ASNT central certifications (e.g., ACCP

Overview
and ASNT NDT Level II) may be used in place of
The Abstract of ANSI/ASNT CP-189: ASNT Standard employer examinations, as applicable, provided
for Qualification and Certification of Nondestructive Testing there is no conflict with the governing industry
Personnel (2020) contains the following statements: “This code or standard.
1.5.1 For Level II specific and practical
standard applies to personnel whose specific tasks or jobs
examinations, the NDT Level III shall
require appropriate knowledge of the technical principles
ensure that the content of these
underlying nondestructive testing (NDT) methods for which
examinations satisfies the requirements
they have responsibilities within the scope of their employment. in Sections 6.3.2 and 6.3.3, respectively,
These specific tasks or jobs include, but are not limited to, per- in the employer’s program.
forming, specifying, reviewing, monitoring, supervising, and 1.5.2 The use of third-party central
evaluating NDT work. … certifications satisfying the requirements
“Employers or other persons utilizing nondestructive testing for employer-based examinations shall
services are cautioned that they retain full responsibility for be documented in the employer’s
ultimate determination of the qualifications of NDT person- certification procedure.
nel and for the certification process. The process of personnel
qualification and certification as detailed in the standard does It is clear that the tone of this document is distinctly more
not relieve the employer of the ultimate legal responsibility to regimented than the scope of SNT-TC-1A, which states that “this
ensure that the NDT personnel are fully qualified for the tasks document provides guidelines for the establishment of a qual-
being undertaken.” ification and certification program” and “it is recognized that
These statements define who is under the jurisdiction of the these guidelines may not be appropriate for certain employers’
standard and state that the ultimate responsibility of the qualifi- circumstances and/or applications.” The standard demands that
cation and certification process remains with the employer. The a minimum set of requirements be met by all employers who
fact that CP-189 is an American National Standard signifies that claim to have a program that embraces the standard.
the requirements for due process, consensus, and other criteria The following comments are intended to amplify the differ-
as defined by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) ences and similarities between the standard, CP-189, and the
have been met by the standard developer, in this case, the recommended practice, SNT-TC-1A.
American Society for Nondestructive Testing.

Section 2: Definitions
Section 1: Scope
In Section 2, Definitions, of CP-189 (2020), 24 definitions are
Section 1 of CP-189 (2020) reads as follows: listed to remove any ambiguity about terms used throughout the
body of the standard. The term “Practical Examination” is clari-
1.0 Scope fied in its use on behalf of the employer and the fact that obser-
1.1 This standard establishes the minimum vations and results must be documented. “Grading Unit” is a
requirements for the qualification and certification term used in both SNT-TC-1A and CP-189 to explain that a qual-
of nondestructive testing (NDT) and predictive ification specimen can be divided into sections that do not have
maintenance (PdM) personnel. to be equal length or equal spacing, unflawed or flawed. “Test
1.2 This standard details the minimum training,
Technique” (a category within an NDT method—for example,
education, and experience requirements for NDT
immersion ultrasonic testing) is distinguished from “Method”
personnel and provides criteria for documenting
(one of the disciplines of NDT—for example, ultrasonic testing—
qualifications, and certification.
1.3 This standard requires the employer to establish a within which various test techniques may exist).
procedure for the certification of NDT personnel. In paragraph 2.2.1, an “NDT Level III” is identified as “an
1.4 This standard requires that the employer individual possessing a currently valid ASNT NDT or PdM
incorporate any unique or additional Level III certificate or ACCP Professional Level III certificate and
requirements in the certification procedure. certified in accordance with this standard.” Thus, in order to

35
 |
SECTION I PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

become an employer’s NDT Level III, CP-189 mandates that the 2.1.10 Experience. Actual performance of an
individual hold a current, valid ASNT Level III certificate. Other NDT method conducted in the work
requirements must be customized to the needs of the employer environment resulting in the acquisition
in accordance with the employer’s written NDT personnel qual- of knowledge and skill. This does not
ification and certification procedure. include formal classroom training, but
may include laboratory and on-the-job
Section 2 of CP-189 (2020) reads as follows:
training as defined by the employer’s
certification procedure.
2.0 Definitions 2.1.11 Grading Unit. A qualification specimen
2.1 Purpose. These definitions are intended to clarify can be divided into sections called
the meanings of terms used in this standard, grading units, which do not have to
as they apply to this standard, and only to this be equal length or be equally spaced.
standard. No broader application of these Grading units are unflawed or flawed
definitions is implied. For specific definitions and the percentage of flawed/unflawed
related to NDT see 10.2. grading units required shall be approved
2.1.1 Calibration, Instrument. The by the NDT Level III.
comparison of an instrument with, or 2.1.12 Formal Training. An organized and
the adjustment of an instrument to, documented program of activities
a known reference(s) often traceable designed to impart the knowledge and
to the applicable country’s national skills required to be qualified to this
institute or standards body. (See also standard. Formal training may be a mix
Standardization, Instrument.) of classroom, practical, and programmed
2.1.2 Certification. Written testimony that self-instruction as approved by the
an individual has met the applicable responsible NDT Level III.
requirements of this standard. 2.1.13 General Examination. A written
2.1.3 Certification Procedure. A written examination addressing the basic
procedure, developed by the employer, principles of the applicable NDT method.
that details the requirements for 2.1.14 Method. One of the disciplines of NDT;
qualification and certification of an for example, ultrasonic testing, within
employee to this national standard. which various test techniques may exist.
2.1.4 Certifying Authority. The person 2.1.15 NDT Instructor. An individual qualified
or persons properly designated in and designated in accordance with
the certification procedure to sign this standard to train or educate NDT
certifications on behalf of the employer. personnel. (See also Section 3.7.)
2.1.5 Closed-book Examination. An 2.1.16 NDT Procedure. A written instruction for
examination administered without conducting a nondestructive test.
access to reference material except that 2.1.17 Outside Organization. An agency or
supplied with or in the examination. individual who provides NDT Level III
2.1.6 Documented. The condition of being in services. (See also paragraph 4.5.)
written form. 2.1.18 Personalized Instruction. Personalized
2.1.7 Education. An institutionalized program, instruction may consist of blended
prescribed by appropriate authorities, classroom, supervised laboratory, and/
that is offered by schools, institutes, or hybrid online competency-based
organizations, colleges, or universities course delivery. Modular content is
established for the sole purpose of covered through online presentations,
providing instruction in an orderly, in the classroom, and/or in small groups.
planned, and systematic fashion. Personalized instruction also enables
2.1.8 Employer. The corporate, private, or students to achieve competency
public entity, which employs personnel using strategies that align with their
directly or indirectly for wages, salary, knowledge, skills, and learning styles.
fees, or other considerations. This would 2.1.19 Practical Examination. An examination
include organizations which obtain used to demonstrate an individual’s
their qualified supplemental workforce ability in conducting the NDT methods
personnel through third-party agencies, that will be performed for the employer.
providing the use and certification For practical examinations, questions and
of those supplemental employees is answers need not necessarily be written,
addressed in the employer’s certification but observations and results must be
procedure. documented.
2.1.9 Examination. A formal, controlled,
documented assessment of knowledge
or skills conducted in accordance with a
procedure.
 2.1.20 Predictive Maintenance (PdM). Section 3: Levels of Qualification
Evaluates the condition of equipment
In Section 3, Levels of Qualification, the six levels of qualifi-
(typically in service) by performing
periodic or continuous (online) cation are defined in terms of the skills and knowledge required
equipment condition monitoring. in a given method or methods to perform specified NDT activ-
Condition monitoring evaluates leading ities. These are Level III, Level II, Level II Limited, Level I,
performance indicators of each item trainee, and NDT instructor. Level III, Level II, and Level I are
in the PdM program inventory. These nominally the same as those identified in SNT-TC-1A. The last
leading indicators may be an increase two formalize the status of the trainee and create a category of
in electrical resistance or increase NDT instructor who can function as course organizer and pre-
vibration from rotating equipment. PdM senter, but under the cognizance of the employer’s authorized
uses principles of statistical process
(certified) Level III.
control to determine at what point
Section 3 of CP-189 (2020) reads as follows:
in the future maintenance activities
will be appropriate while focusing on
leading indicators that may signify 3.0 Levels of Qualification
deterioration in performance which can 3.1 Classification. Six levels of qualification are
lead to equipment failure. The ultimate defined in terms of the skills and knowledge
goal of PdM is to perform maintenance required in a given method or methods to
at a scheduled point in time when perform specified NDT activities.
the maintenance activity is most cost- 3.2 NDT Level III. An NDT Level III shall have the
effective and before the equipment loses skills and knowledge to establish techniques; to
optimum performance or fails. interpret codes, standards, and specifications;
2.1.21 Qualification. The education, skills, designate the particular technique to be used;
training, knowledge, and experience and to verify the adequacy of procedures. The
required for personnel to properly individual shall also have general familiarity with
perform to a specified NDT Level. the NDT methods covered in Appendix A of
2.1.22 Specific Examination. A written this standard. The NDT Level III shall be capable
examination to determine an individual’s of conducting or directing the training and
understanding of procedures, codes, examining of NDT personnel in the methods for
standards, specifications, and equipment which the NDT Level III is qualified.
or instrumentation for an NDT method 3.3 NDT Level II. An NDT Level II shall have the
used by the employer. skills and knowledge to set up and standardize
2.1.23 Standardization, Instrument. The equipment, to conduct tests, and to interpret,
adjustment of an NDT instrument using evaluate, and document results in accordance
an appropriate reference standard with procedures approved by an NDT Level III.
to obtain or establish a known and The NDT Level II shall be thoroughly familiar with
reproducible response. (This is usually the scope and limitations of the method to which
done prior to an examination, but can certified and should be capable of directing the
be carried out anytime there is concern work of trainees and NDT Level I personnel. The
about the examination or instrument NDT Level II shall be able to organize and report
response.) (See also Calibration, nondestructive test results.
Instrument.) 3.4 NDT Level II Limited. An NDT Level II Limited
2.1.24 Test Technique. A category within an shall have the skills and knowledge to set up and
NDT method; for example, immersion standardize equipment, to conduct tests, and
ultrasonic testing. to interpret, evaluate, and document results in
2.2 NDT Levels accordance with procedures approved by an NDT
2.2.1 NDT Level III. An individual possessing Level III in the techniques listed in Appendix B.
a currently valid ASNT NDT or PdM The NDT Level II Limited shall be thoroughly
Level III certificate or ACCP Professional familiar with the scope and limitations of the
Level III certificate (see 10.1.2 and technique to which certified and should be
10.1.3) and certified in accordance capable of directing the work of trainees and NDT
with this standard. (See also Section 3.) Level I personnel. The NDT Level II Limited shall
Reference to ASNT Level III throughout be able to organize and report nondestructive
this standard implies the individual holds test results.
one of these certificates. Reference to
an ASNT Level III certificate throughout
this standard refers to one of the above
certificates.
2.2.2 NDT Level I, NDT Level II. An individual
certified in accordance with this standard.
(See also Section 3.)

37
 |
SECTION I PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

3.5 NDT Level I. An NDT Level I shall have the skills Both SNT-TC-1A and CP-189 call for a minimum number of
and knowledge to properly perform specific hours worked in the specific method as well as a minimum total
standardize, specific tests, and with prior written number of hours worked in NDT. The total experience require-
approval of the NDT Level III, perform specific ment can be satisfied by working in two or more methods as
interpretations and evaluations for acceptance well as doing other activities that support the NDT program of
or rejection and document the results, in
the employer. (SNT-TC-1A and CP-189 have equivalent training
accordance with specific approved procedures.
and experience requirements.)
The NDT Level I shall be able to follow approved
When using CP-189 Appendix A or SNT-TC-1A Table 6.3.1A,
nondestructive testing procedures and shall
receive the necessary guidance or supervision it is important to note that the minimum experience hours must
from a certified NDT Level II or NDT Level III be documented by method and by hour. A candidate’s previous
individual. training and experience may be accepted by the employer if
3.6 Trainee. A person who is not yet certified to any verified and documented in writing by the previous employer(s)
level shall be considered a trainee. Trainees shall or training agency(ies).
work with a certified person, under the direction Although employers often have their own NDT Level III to
of an NDT Level II or NDT Level III and shall not administer the various aspects of the employer’s NDT personnel
independently conduct any tests or write a report qualification and certification program, an outside organization
of test results.
may be engaged to perform the duties of an NDT Level III. In
3.7 NDT Instructor. An NDT instructor shall have
such instances, the employer is responsible for verifying that the
the skills and knowledge to plan, organize, and
organization complies with the employer’s certification proce-
present classroom, laboratory, demonstration,
and/or on-the-job NDT instruction, training, and/ dure and CP-189.
or education programs in accordance with course Section 4 of CP-189 (2020) reads as follows:
outlines approved by an NDT Level III.
4.0 Qualifications Requirements
4.1 Training. Candidates for certification as NDT
Section 4: Qualification Requirements Level I or Level II shall complete sufficient
Section 4, Qualification Requirements, addresses training, organized training to become familiar with the
experience, instructor criteria, and the use of outside NDT principles of the method and the practices of the
applicable test technique. This training shall be
Level III services. The training is to be done in accordance with
conducted in accordance with a course outline
a course outline approved by an NDT Level III and must include
approved by an NDT Level III.
the topics contained in CP-105 for the appropriate NDT method. 4.1.1 NDT Level I and Level II. The minimum
The training program may include other topics deemed nec- number of training hours required for
essary by the NDT Level III. “Organized training” is expanded NDT Level I and Level II candidates is
in CP-189, paragraph 4.1.1.1, to include “instructor-led training, described in Appendices A and B. The
personalized instruction, virtual instructor-led training, comput- course shall include the topics contained
er-based training, or web-based training.” in ANSI/ASNT CP-105 for the appropriate
Computer-based training and web-based training shall NDT method, plus such additional
track hours and content of training with student examinations. topics as deemed necessary by the NDT
The training programs shall include sufficient examinations Level III. The sequence, content, amount
of time spent, and depth of coverage for
to demonstrate that the necessary information has been com-
each topic shall be approved by the NDT
prehended. A satisfactory passing score on a final examination
Level III. Training programs shall include
covering the topics contained in the training program is neces- sufficient examinations to demonstrate
sary in order to receive credit for the training hours. that the necessary information has been
Recognizing that NDT is a unique application of the comprehended.
concepts of physics, electronics, and chemistry, CP-189 requires 4.1.1.1 The organized training may
that all training shall be presented by an NDT instructor desig- include instructor-led training,
nated by the NDT Level III individual. The NDT instructor is an personalized instruction,
individual who not only has the skills and knowledge for con- virtual instructor-led training,
ducting training programs but also is required to develop and computer-based training, or
conduct such courses in accordance with the course outlines web-based training. Computer-
based training and web-based
approved by the NDT Level III. The NDT Level III in all cases is
training shall track hours and
responsible for the content of each completed course. In order
content of training with student
to qualify, an NDT instructor must satisfy at least one of the four examinations in accordance
criteria. (See 4.4.1.1–4.4.1.4.) with 4.1.2.
Training and experience qualifications of the NDT Level III
are automatically met when an individual holds a valid ASNT
Level III certificate.
 4.1.2 Credit. To receive credit for training 4.4.1.3 be a graduate of a two-year
hours, the individual shall pass a school of science, engineering,
final examination covering the topics or NDT and have five or more
contained in that program. years of experience as an NDT
4.1.3 Presentation of Training. All training Level II, or equivalent, in the
shall be presented by an NDT instructor. NDT method to be taught; or
However, the NDT instructor may use 4.4.1.4 have 10 or more years of
personnel with specialized expertise NDT experience as an NDT
(for example, metallurgists, welding Level II, or equivalent, in the
engineers, etc.) who are not qualified in NDT method to be taught.
accordance with this standard to assist 4.4.2 Designation. The NDT instructor shall be
in presentation of specific information. designated by an NDT Level III individual.
The NDT Level III shall in all cases be The designation shall become part of the
responsible for the content of the individual’s qualification records.
completed course. 4.5 Outside Services. At the option of the employer,
4.1.4 NDT Level III. Training requirements an outside organization may be engaged to
for NDT Level III are satisfied as a result perform the duties of an NDT Level III. For
of holding a current ASNT Level III organizations other than ASNT, the employer shall
certificate in the specific NDT method. be responsible for evaluating the organization
4.2 Experience. Candidates for certification shall to ensure the services are in accordance with
have acquired the practical experience to ensure the employer’s certification procedure and this
they are capable of performing the duties of the standard, and so documented. An NDT Level III
level in which certification is being sought. of the engaged outside organization shall be
4.2.1 NDT Level I and Level II. The minimum responsible for the services provided.
number of hours of experience required
for NDT Level I and Level II candidates is
described in Appendix A.
Section 5: Qualification and Certification
4.2.2 NDT Level II Limited. The minimum Section 5, Qualification and Certification, addresses the cer-
number of hours of experience required tification procedure for qualifying and certifying NDT personnel.
for NDT Level II Limited candidates is
The employer’s certification procedure describes the minimum
described in Appendix B.
requirements for certifying personnel in each NDT method and
4.2.3 NDT Level III. Experience requirements
is approved by the designated NDT Level III. The certification
for NDT Level III are satisfied as a result
of holding a current ASNT Level III procedure includes personnel duties and responsibilities, as well
certificate in the specific NDT method. as the required training, experience, examinations, records, and
4.3 Previous Training and Experience recertification processes to be followed.
4.3.1 NDT Level I and Level II. A candidate’s Section 5 of CP-189 (2020) reads as follows:
previous training and experience may be
accepted by the employer’s NDT Level III 5.0 Qualification and Certification
if documented and verified. Any claimed 5.1 Certification Procedure. The employer shall
training or experience which is not develop and maintain a procedure detailing the
documented and cannot be verified shall program that will be used for qualification and
be considered invalid. certification of NDT personnel in accordance with
4.3.2 NDT Level III. The employer shall verify this standard.
and document the current validity of a 5.2 Certification Procedure Requirements.
candidate’s ASNT Level III certificate. The procedure shall describe the minimum
4.4 NDT Instructor requirements for certifying personnel in each NDT
4.4.1 Criteria. An NDT instructor shall meet at method and the levels of qualification desired.
least one of the following criteria: The procedure shall satisfy the requirements of
4.4.1.1 possess a current ASNT Level III this standard. The procedure shall include, as a
certificate in the NDT method minimum, the following:
to be taught; 5.2.1 personnel duties and responsibilities;
4.4.1.2 have academic credentials at 5.2.2 training requirements;
least equivalent to a B.S. in 5.2.3 experience requirements;
engineering, physical science, 5.2.4 examination requirements;
or technology, and possess 5.2.5 records and documentation
adequate knowledge in the requirements, including control,
NDT method to be taught; or responsibility, and retention period; and
5.2.6 recertification requirements.
5.3 Approval. The employer’s certification procedure
shall be approved by an NDT Level III designated
by the employer.

39
 |
SECTION I PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

Section 6: Examinations applicable NDT method. (NOTE: Table 1. Minimum Number of

Examination Questions, in CP-189 is comparable to Table 8.3.4
Section 6, Examinations, addresses vision requirements
in SNT-TC-1A with the exception that only the 12 methods for
and the administration of written and practical examinations
which ASNT administers NDT Level III examinations are listed.
for the qualification of NDT Level I, II, and III personnel. The
Vibration analysis, although listed, is considered a predictive
near-distance vision examination calls for an individual to be
maintenance [PdM] method in CP-105 and thus falls outside
capable of reading a Jaeger Number 1 test chart at a distance of
the scope of this study guide. At the time of this printing, the
not less than 12 in. (30.5 cm), rather than the Jaeger Number 2
neutron radiographic testing examination was temporarily sus-
of SNT-TC-1A, and to be administered in accordance with a
pended, but remains in the table. The following four methods
procedure, and by personnel, approved by the designated NDT
are not represented: ground penetrating radar, guided wave
Level III. In addition to color differentiation, NDT person-
testing, laser methods testing, and microwave technology
nel must be able to distinguish shades of gray used in a given
testing.)
method.
In addition, candidates may have to show the ability to
Level I and Level II personnel are to receive a closed-book
prepare an NDT procedure appropriate to the employer’s needs,
General examination approved by the designated NDT Level III
if they do not have documented experience demonstrating that
over a cross section of the body of knowledge applicable to
they had previously prepared similar procedures in the method
each method and NDT level. Level I and Level II personnel are
using the specifications, codes, and standards that are applica-
to receive a closed-book Specific examination, supported by
ble to that employer.
NDT Level III approved reference materials, addressing various
If the NDT Level III will be required to perform tests or
examples of equipment, procedures, and test techniques that
evaluate test results, the practical examination must include the
the candidate may use in the performance of assigned duties.
same demonstrations of ability to perform the required activities
The Level I Practical examination requires that the can-
as that of the Level II.
didate demonstrate proficiency in using the applicable NDT
The employer’s NDT Level III is responsible for the admin-
method to examine at least one representative test sample for
istration and grading of the examinations, but the grading and
each technique to be used in the candidate’s job. This includes
administration of multiple-choice objective questions can be
the documentation of the results of the test(s).
delegated when properly documented. The practical examina-
The Level II Practical examination requires that the candi-
tion is to be administered by an NDT Level III in the respective
date demonstrate proficiency using the applicable NDT method
test method. The employer is responsible for having an ASNT
to examine two or more representative test samples for each
Level III develop, administer, and grade the Level III Specific
method and at least one sample for each technique to be used
and Practical examinations. Employer examinations require a
in the candidate’s job. This includes the interpretation, evalua-
minimum 70% on individual tests and a minimum 80% on the
tion, and documentation of the examination’s results.
overall average grade.
The Level I Practical examination and the Level II Practical
For a Level I or Level II candidate to pass the practical
examination are similar to those recommended by SNT-TC-1A,
examination, discontinuities or conditions previously speci-
with the exception that the test samples used are to be represen-
fied by the Level III are to be located and evaluated. A written
tative of the products that will be encountered when perform-
checklist is to be used addressing equipment and technique
ing their job functions. This difference ensures that the CP-189
proficiency, proper adherence to the procedure, test sequence,
examinations must be representative of the product typical of
calibrations, materials, documentation, and extent of examina-
that which candidates will likely encounter in performing their
tion. If the candidate is required to perform interpretation or
job function.
evaluation of results, these are also to be part of the checklist. In
More explicit examination requirements have been placed
addition, the Level II checklist includes proper extent of exam-
on the NDT Level III due to the many variations in background
ination, accuracy, and completeness of interpretations, evalua-
and work activities found in the field. As a prerequisite, a can-
tions, and documentation of the activities and test results.
didate for the position of an employer’s Level III must hold an
If a candidate fails an examination, the requirements for
ASNT Level III certificate with a currently valid endorsement
reexamination are similar to SNT-TC-1A (receive additional
for each method for which employer certification is sought, and
training or wait 30 days), except that a candidate is not to be
he or she must also satisfactorily complete a Specific examina-
reexamined using the previous failed examination and/or
tion comprising 30 questions on the employer’s specifications
specimen.
and standards for each method. A valid endorsement on an
The employer’s representative who administers the Level III
ASNT Level III certificate fulfills the examination criteria for only
examinations must possess a current ASNT Level III certificate
the Basic examination and the method examination for each
in the method and be familiar with the standards used and the
products made by the employer. Self-examination and examina- 6.2.3 Practical Examination. The candidate
tion by subordinates are prohibited. shall prepare an NDT procedure
Section 6 of CP-189 (2020) reads as follows: appropriate to the employer’s needs;
however, if documented experience
6.0 Examinations demonstrates that the candidate has
6.1 Vision previously prepared acceptable NDT
6.1.1 Near Distance. Prior to certification, NDT procedures in the method using the
personnel shall be examined to ensure specifications, codes, and standards
that they have natural or corrected that are applicable to that employer,
near-distance acuity in at least one eye a written practical examination (for
such that each individual is capable of example, preparation of a procedure) is
reading Jaeger Number 1 test chart not required. If experience is substituted
or equivalent* at a distance of not less for the written practical examination, the
than 12 in. employer shall document the pertinent
*Equivalent eye examination results practical experience of the NDT Level III
for Jaeger J-1 visual acuity are: Snellen candidate.
20/22; Times Roman 3.5 point text; 6.2.3.1 If the NDT Level III will be
OrthoRater #9; or Titmus (SAB-1, SAL-1 required to perform tests
or SAR-1) #10. or evaluate test results,
6.1.2 Color Vision. NDT personnel for all the practical examination
methods shall demonstrate the ability to shall include the same
differentiate among the colors or shades demonstrations of the
of gray used in the method. candidate’s ability to perform
6.1.3 Frequency. Vision examinations shall the required activity(ies) as
be administered annually, except that required in 6.3.3.2.
color differentiation examinations need 6.3 NDT Level I and Level II Examinations
be repeated only at each recertification. 6.3.1 General. A general examination shall
Vision examinations shall expire on the be approved by an NDT Level III.
last day of the month of expiration. Administration of the examination shall
6.1.4 Administration. Vision examinations be in accordance with paragraph 6.6
shall be administered in accordance of this standard and shall be closed
with a procedure, and by personnel, book. Reference material, such as
approved by an NDT Level III designated charts, formulas, tables, and graphs
by the employer. may be provided by the NDT Level III.
6.2 NDT Level III Examinations Questions shall be developed which
6.2.1 Initial Requirement. Prior to the represent a cross section of the body
employer’s certification examinations, of knowledge contained in ANSI/ASNT
the candidate shall hold a current ASNT CP-105 applicable to each method and
Level III certificate with a currently valid NDT level. The minimum number of
endorsement for each method for which questions required for each method and
employer certification is sought. level is listed in Table 1. Questions used
6.2.2 Specific Examination (for each method). in general examinations for NDT Level I
The employer shall administer a written and Level II personnel shall be similar
examination consisting of at least 30 in type and difficulty to those published
questions relating to the comprehension by ASNT.
of the NDT-related requirements of 6.3.2 Specific. A specific examination shall
specifications or standards used by be approved by an NDT Level III.
the employer. Copies of the applicable Administration shall be in accordance
specifications or standards shall be with paragraph 6.6 of this standard. The
available as reference material during the NDT Level III shall determine whether
examination. appropriate procedures, specifications,
standards, or code sections will be
provided. The examination shall address
various examples of equipment,
procedures, and test techniques that the
candidate may use in the performance of
assigned duties. The minimum number of
questions required for each method and
level is listed in Table 1.

41
 |
SECTION I PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

6.3.3 Practical. A practical examination 6.4 Administration and Grading

shall be approved by an NDT Level III. 6.4.1 Responsibilities
Administration shall be in accordance 6.4.1.1 NDT Level I and II
with paragraph 6.6 of this standard. The Examinations. An NDT
practical examination shall consist of the Level III shall be responsible
following: for the development, approval,
6.3.3.1 NDT Level I. The candidate administration, and grading
shall demonstrate proficiency of examinations for NDT
using the applicable Level I and Level II personnel
nondestructive test method for those methods in which
to examine at least one test the NDT Level III has a valid
sample for each technique to ASNT Level III certificate. For
be used in the candidate’s job the practical examination, the
and by documenting the results individual administering the
of the test. The test samples examination must be an NDT
shall be representative of the Level III in the respective test
products that the candidate will method.
encounter in performing the 6.4.1.2 NDT Level III Examinations.
job functions. The employer shall be
6.3.3.2 NDT Level II. The candidate responsible for having an
shall demonstrate proficiency individual possessing a current
by performing the applicable ASNT Level III certificate, in
nondestructive test method in the respective test method,
examining at least one sample develop, administer, and grade
per technique and a minimum NDT Level III specific and
of two samples per method and practical examinations.
by interpreting, evaluating, and 6.4.1.3 The administration and grading
documenting the results of the of multiple-choice questions
examination. The test samples may be delegated by the NDT
shall be representative of the Level III, if so documented.
product that the candidate will 6.4.2 Employer Examinations. For each
encounter in performing the employer-administered certification
job functions. written examination, each candidate
shall achieve a grade of at least 70%. For
For purposes of the practical
practical examinations, each candidate
examinations described in
shall achieve a grade of at least 80%.
paragraph 6.3.3 the techniques
A composite average grade of 80% is
required to be demonstrated
required to be eligible for certification.
are in Appendix A. Where
All certification examinations shall have
no techniques are listed in
equal weight in determining the average
Appendix A the employer
grade.
must determine the techniques
6.4.3 Practical Examinations
required for their particular
6.4.3.1 For all practical examinations,
needs in that method and
all applicable discontinuities
specify those techniques
and/or conditions which the
required for certification in their
candidate is expected to
qualification and certification
find and/or evaluate must be
procedure.
specified and documented
by the NDT Level III prior
to administration of the
examination.
6.4.3.2 A requirement for passing the
NDT Level I, II, or III practical
examination shall be the
detection of the discontinuities
and/or conditions previously
specified by the NDT Level III
responsible for preparing that
examination.
6.4.4 NDT Level I Practical Examinations. 6.4.6 NDT Level III Practical Examinations.
The NDT Level III shall use a written Persons administering NDT Level III
checklist in administering and grading practical examinations shall use a
NDT Level I practical examinations. written checklist. The checklist shall
This checklist shall address at least address items relating to the technical
the following items: proficiency in and practical adequacy of the NDT
use of equipment and technique, procedure(s) prepared by the candidate.
proper adherence to procedure, When applicable to the candidate’s job
test sequence, standardizations, responsibilities, the checklist shall also
materials, documentation, and extent address the items listed in 6.4.5.
of examinations. If the NDT Level I will 6.5 Reexamination. Candidates who fail to attain the
interpret or evaluate results, the checklist required passing grade must receive additional
shall include these item(s). documented training or wait at least 30 days for
6.4.5 NDT Level II Practical Examinations. reexamination. This training shall address the
The NDT Level III shall use a written deficiencies which caused failure. A candidate
checklist in administering and grading shall not be reexamined using the examination or
NDT Level II practical examinations. specimen previously failed or both.
The checklist shall address at least 6.6 Administration of Examinations. In no case shall
the following items: proficiency in an examination be prepared or administered
use of techniques and equipment; by the individual being examined or by a
proper adherence to procedure, subordinate.
test sequence, standardizations, and 6.7 Administration of NDT Level III Examinations.
materials; satisfactory detection and The employer’s representative who administers
location of discontinuities; proper the NDT Level III specific and practical
extent of examination; and the accuracy examinations shall possess a current ASNT
and completeness of interpretations, Level III certificate in the method for which
evaluations, and documentation of the the examination is administered and shall be
activities and test results. knowledgeable and familiar with the standards,
6.4.5.1 Film Interpretation Limited specifications, and products used or made by the
Certification. The practical employer.
examination shall consist
of a sufficient number of
radiographs to demonstrate
satisfactory performance to
the satisfaction of the NDT
Level III. The number of
radiographs shall be addressed
in the employer’s certification
procedure.
6.4.5.2 Phased Array Ultrasonic
Testing (PAUT) and Time of
Flight Diffraction (TOFD).
Flawed samples used for
practical examinations
should be representative
of the components and/
or configurations that the
candidates would be testing
under this endorsement and
approved by the NDT Level III.

43
 |
SECTION I PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

Section 7: Expiration, Suspension, Revocation, and 7.3.2 for NDT Level III personnel, the ASNT
Reinstatement of Employer Certification Level III certificate has been revoked; or
7.3.3 an individual’s conduct is deemed by the
Section 7 addresses Expiration, Suspension, Revocation, and employer to be or have been unethical
Reinstatement of Employer Certification. As with SNT-TC-1A, an or incompetent.
individual’s certification(s) expire when employment with the 7.4 Reinstatement
employer is terminated or on the last day of the month at the 7.4.1 Suspended Certifications.
end of five years for Levels I and II. The Level III certification Reinstatement of suspended
expires when the ASNT Level III certificate has expired. certifications for NDT Level I or NDT
Certifications can be suspended for exceeding the one-year Level II shall be determined by the NDT
vision recheck period, for inactivity in a method for more than Level III. Reinstatement of suspended
NDT Level III certifications shall be
12 months, or for deficient performance as determined by the
determined by the employer, except
Level III. Level IIIs are suspended if their ASNT Level III certifi-
that the requirement for ASNT Level III
cate is not renewed. certification may not be waived.
Certifications are revoked if inactivity in a method exceeds 7.4.2 Expired or Revoked Certifications.
24 months, if the ASNT Level III certificate is revoked, or if there Certifications which have expired or have
is unethical or incompetent conduct. been revoked may only be reinstated by
Reinstatement for Level I and Level II is determined by complying with Sections 6, 7.4.3, or 8.1.
the Level III. Reinstatement for the Level III is determined by Reinstatement per 7.4.3 is only allowed
the employer as long as the Level III holds a valid ASNT Level when the employee’s certification
III certificate. Expired or revoked certifications may only be expired due to termination of
reinstated by complying with Sections 6, paragraph 7.4.3, or employment. Such reinstatement of
certification shall only be for the period
Section 8.0.
of time remaining on the original
Section 7 of CP-189 (2020) reads as follows:
certification.
7.4.3 Expired for Termination of
7.0 Expiration, Suspension, Revocation, and Reinstate- Employment. An NDT Level I, Level II, or
ment of Employer Certification Level III whose certification has expired
7.1 Expiration. Individual certifications shall expire: due to termination of employment may
7.1.1 when employment with the employer is be reinstated to the former NDT level,
terminated; without a new examination, providing all
7.1.2 on the last day of the month of expiration of the following conditions are met:
at the end of five years for NDT Level I 7.4.3.1 the employer has maintained
and NDT Level II individuals; the personnel certification
7.1.3 for NDT Level III individuals, when the records required in Section 9;
ASNT Level III certificate has expired. 7.4.3.2 the employee certification did
7.2 Suspension. The employer shall suspend an not expire during termination;
individual’s certification if: and
7.2.1 the near-distance vision examination 7.4.3.3 the employee is being
interval exceeds one year. Certification is reinstated within 12 months of
reinstated concurrently with passing the termination.
vision reexamination; or
7.2.2 the individual has not performed the Section 8: Employer Recertification
duties in the method(s) for which
Section 8, Employer Recertification, has been divided into
certified during any consecutive
two parts. For Level I and Level II personnel, every five years
12-month period; or
recertification may be based on evidence of experience in the
7.2.3 the individual’s performance is
determined to be deficient in the method of at least two months or 350 hours (over that five-
required method or technique for year period) and successfully passing a Specific examination
specific documented reasons; or that meets the requirements of paragraph 6.3.2. Every 10 years,
7.2.4 for NDT Level III personnel, when the examinations in Section 6 must be repeated. For Level III per-
ASNT Level III certificate has not been sonnel, recertification relies on verification of the currency of
renewed. the Level III’s ASNT certificate every five years.
7.3 Revocation. The employer shall revoke an Section 8 of CP-189 (2020) reads as follows:
individual’s certification when:
7.3.1 the individual has not performed the
duties in the method(s) for which
certified during any consecutive
24-month period; or
8.0 Employer Recertification 9.2.1 Certification Record. The certification
8.1 NDT Level I and NDT Level II. NDT Level I and record shall include at least the following
NDT Level II personnel shall be recertified by information:
re-examination in accordance with Section 6 9.2.1.1 level of certification and NDT
or by meeting the requirements of 8.1.1, when method, including the test
applicable. technique covered; limitations
8.1.1 Every five years, the individual may be (if any), as applicable;
recertified if the individual has at least 9.2.1.2 results of current employer
350 hours of documented experience examinations that the individual
using the applicable method over has taken;
the five-year certification interval and 9.2.1.3 for Level III personnel, a copy of
has successfully passed a specific the candidate’s ASNT Level III
examination which complies with 6.3.2. certificate;
8.1.2 At least every 10 years, the individual 9.2.1.4 dates of certification, expiration,
must repeat the examinations in suspension, revocation, and
Section 6. reinstatement; and
8.2 NDT Level III. NDT Level III personnel shall be 9.2.1.5 the signature, printed name,
recertified by the employer every five years and title of both the designated
by verifying that the individual’s ASNT Level III NDT Level III that verified the
certificate is current in each method for which qualifications of candidate for
recertification is sought. certification and the signature
of employer’s Designated
Section 9: Records Certifying Authority, when
the Level III and Certifying
In Section 9, Records, a minimum set of documents that Authority are identified as
address the qualifications of each NDT individual is required. separate positions in the
Included are the employer’s certification documentation, an certification procedure.
experience record, a record of previous experience (if applica- 9.2.2 NDT Training Record. A documented
ble), the employee’s current examinations, and a vision exam- history of the employee’s training shall
be maintained which identifies: NDT
ination record.
training received by the individual, the
The certification record includes level, method and tech-
organization providing the training,
nique(s), results, and copies of recent examinations; a copy of dates of the training, hours of training,
the current ASNT Level III certificate for Level III personnel evidence of satisfactory completion, and
only; dates of certification, expiration, suspension, revocation, the instructor’s name.
and reinstatement; and the signature, printed name, and title of 9.2.3 NDT Experience Record. A record which
the employer’s certifying representative. identifies the individual’s experience
A training record is required that includes the training performing various nondestructive tests
received, the name of the training organization, the date when shall be maintained for purposes of
training was completed, the hours involved, evidence of satisfac- verifying initial certification experience
tory completion, and the instructor’s name. and continuing experience.
9.2.4 Record of Previous Experience.
A record that identifies the individual’s experience perform-
Documented evidence of the individual’s
ing various nondestructive tests shall be maintained for the
previous NDT training and experience
purpose of verifying initial certification experience and continu- shall be maintained if previous training
ing experience. Previous experience shall also be documented if and experience are used to satisfy any
it is used to satisfy any part of the qualification requirements. part of the requirements of this standard.
Section 9 of CP-189 (2020) reads as follows: 9.2.5 Visual Examination Records. Current
records of vision examinations required
9.0 Records by 6.1 shall be maintained.
9.1 Responsibility for Documentation. The 9.2.6 Certification Certificates and Wallet
employer shall document certifications in Cards. The following requirements shall
accordance with this standard. be followed if certification certificates
9.2 Contents of Documentation. The employer’s and/or wallet cards are issued by the
certification documentation shall include at least a employer:
training record, certification record, an experience
record, a record of previous experience (if
applicable), employee’s current examinations, and
a vision examination record.

45
 |
SECTION I PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

9.2.6.1 When certificates or wallet 9.2.6.8.1 The ASNT issued

cards are issued and provided Level III identification
by the employer, the number, when either
requirements of ASNT Policy or both of the signers
G-14 shall be followed to hold ASNT Level III
ensure appropriate usage of certifications.
the ASNT name, acronym, and 9.2.6.9 The certificate or wallet card
logo. should be fully completed
9.2.6.2 The certificate shall indicate at the time of signing by the
that the certification is designated NDT Level III and/or
in accordance with the Certifying Authority so that no
requirements of the employer’s fill-in-the-blank data remains to
certification procedure. be completed by others.
9.2.6.3 The legal name of the employer 9.2.6.10 Changes to certificates or
shall be clearly identified wallet cards should require that
followed by the document a new certificate or wallet card
number and revision/edition be issued whenever changes or
number of the certification alterations are necessitated.
procedure. 9.2.6.11 Dates of certification and
9.2.6.4 The certificate shall indicate expiration.
“CP-189” followed by the four-
digit year of the applicable Section 10: Referenced Publications
edition of CP-189 that the
certification procedure was Section 10 lists documents relevant to the provisions of
developed to follow. CP-189 (2020) as follows:
9.2.6.5 Full legal name of the certified
individual in the ISO basic Latin 10.0 Referenced Publications
alphabet. Additional characters 10.1 The following documents contain provisions
may also be used where which, through reference in this text, constitute
customary to accommodate provisions of this standard. Copies may be
local languages. obtained from The American Society for
9.2.6.6 Level of certification, NDT Nondestructive Testing Inc., PO Box 28518,
method and/or technique, as Columbus, OH 43228-0518, USA.
applicable and limitations (if 10.1.1 ANSI/ASNT CP-105: ASNT Standard
any). Topical Outlines for Qualification of
9.2.6.7 Limitations of certification Nondestructive Testing Personnel, latest
authorization should be clearly edition.
defined, when appropriate 10.1.2 ASNT application package for
for the employer, which may certification of nondestructive testing
include restrictions on product personnel.
forms, industry sectors, codes, 10.1.3 ASNT Central Certification Program,
standards, and examination ASNT Document CP-1, latest edition.
procedures. 10.1.4 ASNT Policy G-14 - Use of the ASNT
9.2.6.8 The full printed legal name Name and ASNT Marks, latest edition.
and signature of both the 10.2 The following document contains specific NDT
designated NDT Level III that terms which, though referenced in this text,
verified the qualifications of constitute provisions of this standard. Copies may
candidate for certification be obtained from ASTM International, 100 Barr
and the designated Certifying Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken,
Authority when the Level III PA 19428-2959, USA.
and Certifying Authority are 10.2.1 ASTM E 1316 (latest edition) - Standard
identified as separate positions Terminology for Nondestructive
in the employer’s certification Examinations, Section A – Common NDT
procedure. Terms.
REVIEW QUESTIONS

1. In accordance with CP-189 (2020), an NDT Level III: 5. The Practical examination shall address the technical and
practical competency of the examinee when following
a. shall be responsible for grading all Level I and Level II prepared NDT procedures for:
certification examinations.
b. must prepare all training materials for NDT Level I a. NDT Level I, NDT Level II, and NDT instructor.
and Level II personnel. b. corporate Level IIIs.
c. must approve all questions to be used on c. all levels of qualification including the trainer or
examinations for Level I and Level II. instructor.
d. must administer all NDT Level I and II written d. NDT Levels I and II.
examinations.
6. CP-189 recognizes the following levels of qualification:
2. Which of the following is true regarding NDT Level III
Practical examinations? a. Level I, Level II, and Level III.
b. trainee, Level I, Level II, and Level III.
a. This examination requirement may be waived if the
c. trainee, Level I, Level II limited, Level II, and Level III.
candidate holds a currently valid ASNT NDT Level III
d. trainee, Level I, Level II limited, Level II, Level III, and
certificate.
NDT instructor.
b. The exam administrator must hold a valid ASNT
Level III certification in the applicable test method.
7 The Level I Practical examination and the Level II Practical
c. The use of a written checklist may be used at the examination are similar to those recommended by
discretion of the administrator. SNT-TC-1A, with the exception that:
d. Exam administration may be delegated to any
authorized representative by the employer. a. two test samples must be used for each technique.
b. two test samples must be used for each different
3. When the near-distance visual acuity examination is given product that will be encountered in their job functions.
using a Jaeger reading card, it must be given: c. the test samples used are to be representative of the
products that will be encountered when performing
a. in accordance with a procedure.
their job functions.
b. by any company NDT Level III.
d. two test samples are to be used for each different
c. by medical personnel only. product that will be encountered in their job functions.
d. biannually if Jaeger J-1 letters are used.
8. In CP-189, as a prerequisite, a candidate for the position
4. As required in CP-189, NDT Level I Practical examinations of an employer’s Level III must hold an ASNT Level III
are intended to be: certificate with a currently valid endorsement for each
method for which employer certification is sought, and:
a. given by the employer’s Level III.
b. passed only if all predefined discontinuities are a. must also satisfactorily complete a Specific
detected and evaluated. examination comprising 15 questions on the
employer’s specifications and standards.
c. given using one or more test samples for each
technique. b. must also satisfactorily complete a Specific
examination comprising 30 questions on the
d. given using one or more test samples for each
employer’s specifications and standards for each
method.
method.
c. must also satisfactorily complete a Specific
examination comprising 30 questions on the
employer’s specifications and standards.
d. must also satisfactorily complete a Specific
examination comprising 15 questions on the
employer’s specifications and standards for each
method.

47
 |
SECTION I PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

9. Under CP-189, an individual’s certification expires when 12. How many levels of qualification are there in CP-189
employment with the employer is terminated or on the (2020)?
last day of the month at the end of five years for Levels I
and II. The Level III certification expires: a. 3
b. 4
a. when the ASNT Level III certificate has expired.
c. 5
b. when the ASNT Level III’s employment with the
d. 6
employer is terminated.
c. when the ASNT Level III is accused of unethical or 13. In accordance with CP-189 (2020), the minimum passing
incompetent conduct. score on the Practical examination is:
d. when the ASNT Level III retires from employment
with the employer. a. 70% following manufacturer’s instructions.
b. 75%.
10. In accordance with CP-189 (2020), the requirements for an c. 80%.
NDT Level III include:
d. 85%.
a. college degree.
14. In accordance with CP-189 (2020), the administration and
b. 10 years as a Level II.
grading of the NDT Level I and NDT Level II multiple-
c. certification by the employer as a company Level III. choice examinations may be performed by the:
d. ASNT NDT Level III or PdM Level III certificate.
a. NDT Level III only.
11. What is the difference between “calibration” and b. NDT Level III or delegate.
“standardization” in CP-189 (2020)? c. NDT Level II.
d. employer’s quality assurance manager.
a. Calibration is the adjustment of an instrument to a
known reference.
15. What are the requirements for vision examinations in
b. Calibration is the adjustment of an instrument to the
accordance with CP-189 (2020)?
dead weight tester or master gauge.
c. Standardization is the adjustment of an instrument to a. Jaeger Number 1.
an NIST traceable national standard. b. Jaeger Number 2.
d. Standardization is the adjustment of an instrument to c. Jaeger Number 2 and color vision.
test blocks supplied by the customer.
d. Jaeger Number 1 and color vision.

16. To be certified as an NDT Level III, what examinations

must be administered by the employer in accordance with
CP-189 (2020)?

a. General, Specific, and Practical.

b. Practical only.
c. General and Specific.
d. Specific and Practical.

ANSWERS
1c 2b 3a 4c 5d 6d 7c 8b 9a 10d 11a 12d 13c 14b
15d 16d
CHAPTER 3

THE ASNT NDT LEVEL III CERTIFICATION

PROGRAM
Ñ Magnetic Flux Leakage Testing (MFL)*
In their fall 1974 meeting, the ASNT Board of Directors
Ñ Magnetic Particle Testing (MT)*
authorized implementation of a voluntary program for certi-
fication of NDT Level III personnel. The Board decided that Ñ Radiographic Testing (RT)
use of the term “certification” as applied in the ASNT NDT Ñ Thermal/Infrared Testing (IR)*
Level III program was appropriate, indicating that person- Ñ Ultrasonic Testing (UT)
nel holding ASNT NDT Level III certificates had met certain
Ñ Visual Testing (VT)*
education, training, experience, and examination require-
ments. It is important to note that the word “certification” as *These examinations comprise 90 questions; the others have 135
used in the Level III program indicates a record of achieve- questions. For examination purposes, MFL is designated ML.
ment and/or qualification. As used in Recommended Practice
No. SNT-TC-1A: Personnel Qualification and Certification in Methods under development (at the time of publication)
Nondestructive Testing, “certification” indicates that employers include microwave technology testing, guided wave testing, and
have authorized NDT Level III personnel to perform work on the reintroduction of neutron radiographic testing.
their behalf. The first ASNT NDT Level III examinations were
given in early 1977.
What Is an ASNT NDT Level III?
The following is a description of the ASNT Level III
Certification Programs. Additional information is available on ASNT NDT Level III personnel are individuals who have
the ASNT website at asnt.org under the Certification menu demonstrated that they are sufficiently knowledgeable to pass
option. The program information document, CP-ASNT-1D, which the Basic and method qualification examinations developed and
describes the ASNT NDT Level III Program in detail, is reprinted administered by ASNT. To gain initial ASNT NDT Level III cer-
from the ASNT website as Appendix B in this publication. tification, eligible candidates must pass the Basic examination
and at least one method examination. Once certified, addi-
tional certifications can be added by passing the applicable
ASNT NDT Level III
method examination as long as the candidate holds one valid
The ASNT NDT Level III program initially offered certification ASNT Level III certification. If all certifications expire, the
in five NDT methods and currently offers certification examina- Basic and method examinations must be passed to regain that
tions in 10 methods. More than 8900 personnel in 86 countries certification.
currently hold more than 28 000 certifications in nondestruc- The Basic examination is a 135-question test that covers the
tive test methods, making the ASNT NDT Level III program administration of certification programs developed in accor-
the largest NDT certification program in the world. ASNT is an dance with SNT-TC-1A and ANSI/ASNT CP-189: ASNT Standard
independent, third-party certification body accredited by the for Qualification and Certification of Nondestructive Testing
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) in accordance Personnel; general knowledge of other NDT test methods; and
with ISO 17024, Conformity Assessment—General Requirements knowledge of materials, fabrication, and production technol-
for Bodies Operating Certification of Persons. All ASNT certifica- ogy. Method examinations may be 90 or 135 questions long and
tion examinations are developed and maintained using psycho- address in-depth knowledge of the theory and practices of the
metric principles that comply with the ISO 17024 requirements. applicable NDT method.
The ASNT method examinations are given in multiple-choice
format in the following NDT test methods. Where reference infor-
ASNT Predictive Maintenance Level III
mation is needed, it is included in the body of the examination.
Ñ Acoustic Emission Testing (AE) ASNT began offering the Predictive Maintenance (PdM)
Level III certification program in 2000 and now offers PdM
Ñ Electromagnetic Testing (ET)
Level III certification in IR. Together, the ASNT NDT Level III
Ñ Leak Testing (LT) program and the ASNT PdM Level III program are known as the
Ñ Liquid Penetrant Testing (PT)* ASNT Level III Certification Program.

49
 |
SECTION I PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

ASNT PdM certification was developed as a result of Upon successful completion of the necessary qualification
industry requests for a third-party certification that focused on examinations, ASNT will issue the candidate an ASNT NDT
PdM knowledge and test methods instead of the traditional Level III certificate and wallet card that is valid for five years.
NDT methods used for NDT Level III certification. In response
to this request, ASNT developed a 90-question PdM Basic
NDT/PdM or PdM/NDT Conversion
examination that covers the same certification requirements
as the NDT Basic examination. However, instead of addressing 1. Personnel with a currently valid NDT certificate in the IR test
knowledge of materials, fabrication, and production technol- method may attain PdM certification in IR by successfully
ogy and other traditional NDT test methods, it covers the basics completing the PdM Basic examination.
of common PdM test methods and knowledge of machinery
2. Personnel with a currently valid PdM certificate in the IR test
technology. PdM certification is currently offered in IR only,
method may attain NDT certification in IR by successfully
and successful completion of the PdM Basic and IR method
completing the NDT Basic examination.
examinations result in the issuance of an ASNT PdM Level III
certificate. 3. This applies to the IR method only.

Recertification
Eligibility for ASNT Level III Examinations
All ASNT Level III certificate holders must be recertified at
Candidates must have met the eligibility requirements speci- five-year intervals by one of the following methods:
fied in paragraph 6.3.2 (p. 3) of SNT-TC-1A (2020): 1. By examination, prior to their certification expiration date
in the applicable method. As long as at least one method
6.3.2 NDT Level III remains current, the Basic examination does not have to be
6.3.2.1 Have a bachelor’s degree
taken again; or
(or higher) in engineering or
science, plus one additional 2. By application, using a “points” system. Recertification by
year of experience beyond the points requires the following three items:
Level II requirements in NDT a. reaffirmation of the ASNT Level III Code of Ethics;
in an assignment comparable
to that of an NDT Level II in the b demonstration of continued NDT activity and Level III
applicable NDT method(s), or: employment; and
6.3.2.2 Have completed with passing c. submittal of documentation showing that 25 recertifi-
grades at least two years of cation points have been earned within the applicant’s
engineering or science study current five-year certification period. Activities that
at a university, college, or earn recertification points are shown in the ASNT NDT
technical school, plus two
Program Renewal Requirements document download-
additional years of experience
able from the ASNT website under the Certification
beyond the NDT Level II
requirements in NDT in an menu.
assignment at least comparable
to that of NDT Level II in the The same recertification requirements apply to PdM
applicable NDT method(s), or: Level III certificate holders.
6.3.2.3 Have four years of experience
beyond the NDT Level II
SNT-TC-1A Certification Options
requirements in NDT in an
assignment at least comparable SNT-TC-1A offers the employer several options for fulfilling
to that of an NDT Level II in the certification responsibilities:
applicable NDT method(s).
Ñ incorporate acceptance of ASNT NDT Level III certification
into the employer’s written practice; or
The above NDT Level III
requirements may be partially Ñ incorporate acceptance of Level III qualification examinations
replaced by experience administered by an outside agency that meet the require-
as a certified NDT Level II ments of the employer’s written practice; or
or by assignments at least
Ñ incorporate the employer’s examinations as defined in the
comparable to NDT Level II
employer’s written practice.
as defined in the employer’s
written practice.
Use of the ASNT NDT Level III Certification ACCP Professional Level III
ASNT NDT Level III certification provides an internation- With the introduction of the ASNT Central Certification
ally recognized way for individuals, companies, and industry Program (ACCP) in the late 1990s, ASNT began offering a
sectors to take advantage of standardized examinations devel- “central” certification for Level IIs and IIIs that aligned with
oped by qualified subject matter experts and administered by multiple international NDT certification standards. In 2005,
an ISO 17024 accredited third-party certification body. Under the program was revised to address the requirements of the
SNT-TC-1A, employers may accept valid ASNT NDT Level III US adoption of ISO 9712, ANSI/ASNT CP-106: Nondestructive
certification as proof that the certificate holder has met the Basic Testing—Qualification and Certification of Personnel. At the time
and method examination requirements for the test methods of publication, the ACCP Program was being updated to bring
listed on the ASNT certificate. The employer must still deter- it into complete compliance with all of the requirements of
mine if the Specific examination requirements have been met ISO 9712-2021, and will be renamed.
and has the sole responsibility for authorizing (certifying) their The ACCP Level III certification requires that candidates
Level III NDT personnel to perform NDT tasks on behalf of their pass the same Basic and method examinations used in the
company. ASNT NDT Level III program, the full ACCP Level II hands-on
NOTE: In the case of CP-189, an individual must hold an Practical examination (unless passed as an ACCP Level II), and
ASNT NDT Level III certificate prior to becoming an organiza- a procedure preparation examination. The Practical examina-
tion’s Level III. In the case of SNT-TC-1A, an individual can use tion requires that candidates demonstrate their ability to apply
the ASNT NDT Level III certificate as one of the many optional the applicable test methods, and the procedure preparation
approaches for becoming an organization’s Level III. But in both examination requires that they write an NDT procedure for a
cases, the ASNT NDT Level III certificate must be augmented specific part based on the requirements of an NDT specification.
with a written practice that identifies, in detail, the manner by For personnel who hold currently valid ASNT NDT Level III cer-
which the organization’s Level III is qualified and certified for tification, the Basic and applicable method examinations need
the specific purposes of the organization. not be retaken.

51
 |
SECTION I PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

REVIEW QUESTIONS

1. ASNT NDT Level III certification is a requirement of: 4. The ASNT NDT Level III Basic examination covers all of
the following except:
a. SNT-TC-1A.
b. CP-189. a. general knowledge of other NDT test methods.
c. CP-106. b. knowledge of SNT-TC-1A and CP-189 certification
programs.
d. both SNT-TC-1A and CP-189.
c. knowledge of materials, fabrication, and production
2. A currently valid ASNT NDT Level III certificate indicates: technology.
d. knowledge of international certification programs.
a. an ASNT Level III is authorized to supervise but not
perform NDT tasks on behalf of the employer. 5. To recertify by application, an ASNT NDT Level III must:
b. the employer can accept a currently valid ASNT NDT
Level III certificate as proof of qualification. a. demonstrate continued NDT activity and Level III
employment.
c. an individual is certified in both NDT and PdM.
b. reexamine prior to their current expiration date.
d. that the certificate holder has satisfied the Basic and
method examination requirements as set forth in c. participate in the ASNT Central Certification
SNT-TC-1A. Program.
d. acquire 25 recertification points since the beginning
3. ASNT NDT Level III certification: of their NDT employment.

a. immediately qualifies a certificate holder to act as the 6. To be eligible to sit for the ASNT NDT Level III
employer’s Level III. examinations, a candidate with two years of passing
b. makes an individual potentially eligible to become an grades in engineering or science study at a university or
employer’s Level III. technical school must have:
c. permits the individual to function as an independent
a. one additional year of experience beyond the Level II
Level III without further documentation.
requirements in NDT in an assignment comparable
d. only applies when recognized by some requirements
to that of an NDT Level II in the applicable NDT
document.
method(s).
b. two additional years of experience beyond the Level
II requirements in NDT in an assignment at least
comparable to that of NDT Level II in the applicable
NDT method(s).
c. four years of experience beyond the Level II
requirements in NDT in an assignment at least
comparable to that of an NDT Level II in the
applicable NDT method(s).
d. one additional year of experience beyond the Level II
requirements in NDT in an assignment comparable
to that of an NDT Level II and an additional 20 hours
of classroom training in the applicable test
method(s).

ANSWERS
1b 2d 3c 4d 5a 6b
 | SECTION II

CHAPTER 4

GENERAL APPLICATIONS OF NDT METHODS

Overview of the ASNT Basic Examination material if difficulty is encountered in answering the following
questions. Note especially that the questions are not difficult
The second part of the ASNT Basic examination for
for those with practical exposure in the use of the method. The
Level III certification covers the examinee’s knowledge and
questions are devised to cover fundamentals, basic techniques,
comprehension of basic and fundamental applications of
and applications.
various NDT methods. While an employer’s current require-
Topical outlines for the methods included in this section
ments for a Level III may only involve one, two, or a few NDT
are from “General Familiarity with Other NDT Methods”
methods, it is not envisioned that a Level III as described in
(pp. 107–10) in the Basic examination Level III unit of ANSI/
paragraph 4.3.3 of SNT-TC-1A can function adequately without
ASNT CP-105: ASNT Standard Topical Outlines for Qualification
some basic knowledge of the existence and applications of
of Nondestructive Testing Personnel (2020). A general reference
commonly used NDT methods.
for each method presented below is the Nondestructive Testing
In light of rapidly expanding technology, NDT Level III per-
Handbook, Vol. 10: Nondestructive Testing Overview, third
sonnel have an obligation to continually review current prac-
edition, published by ASNT in 2012. Another comprehensive
tices, recommend and develop new techniques where applica-
reference is Materials and Processes for NDT Technology, second
ble, and seek more effective methods where applicable. Without
edition: Chapter 12, “Nondestructive Testing Methods,” also
some basic knowledge of the broad applications of NDT tech-
published by ASNT in 2016.
nology, the NDT Level III could not be considered as meeting
the Level III qualifications as defined in paragraph 4.3.3 (p. 3) of
SNT-TC-1A (2020):
Acoustic Emission Testing
An NDT Level III individual should have sufficient technical
knowledge and skills to be capable of developing, qualify- Topical Outline
ing, and approving procedures; establishing and approving
techniques; interpreting codes, standards, specifications, and 2.1 Acoustic Emission Testing (AE)
procedures; and designating the particular NDT methods, 2.1.1 Fundamentals
techniques, and procedures to be used. The NDT Level III 2.1.1.1 Principles/theory of AE
should be responsible for the NDT operations for which 2.1.1.2 Sources of acoustic emissions
qualified and assigned and should be capable of interpreting 2.1.1.3 Equipment and material
and evaluating results in terms of existing codes, standards, 2.1.2 Proper selection of acoustic emission technique
and specifications. The NDT Level III should have sufficient 2.1.2.1 Instrumentation and signal processing
practical background in applicable materials, fabrication, and 2.1.2.2 Cables (types)
product technology to establish techniques and to assist in 2.1.2.3 Signal conditioning
establishing acceptance criteria when none are otherwise 2.1.2.4 Signal detection
available. The NDT Level III should have general familiarity 2.1.2.5 Noise discrimination
with other appropriate NDT methods, as demonstrated by 2.1.2.6 Electronic technique
an ASNT Level III Basic examination or other means. The 2.1.2.7 Attenuation materials
NDT Level III, in the methods in which certified, should have 2.1.2.8 Data filtering techniques
sufficient technical knowledge and skills to be capable of 2.1.3 Interpretation and evaluation of test results
training and examining NDT Level I, II, and III personnel for
certification in those methods.

Topical Outlines, Reference Resources, and Review REFERENCES

Questions ASNT, 2008, Questions & Answers Book: Acoustic Emission Testing Method,
American Society for Nondestructive Testing, Columbus, OH.
This section contains topical outlines, reference resources,
and review questions for selected NDT methods recognized in ASNT, 2005, Nondestructive Testing Handbook, Vol. 6: Acoustic Emission
Testing, third edition, American Society for Nondestructive Testing,
SNT-TC-1A. The reader is advised to use the reference resource Columbus, OH.

53
 |
SECTION II NDT METHODS

AE Review Questions 8. The acoustic emission signal amplitude is related to:

a. the preset threshold.

1. The most common range of AE is:
b. the intensity of the source.
a. 10 to 15 kHz c. the bandpass filters.
b. 100 to 300 kHz d. background noises.
c. 500 to 750 kHz
d. 1 to 5 MHz 9. Threshold settings are determined by the:

a. graininess of the material.

2. Discontinuities that are not readily detectable by AE are:
b. attenuation of the material.
a. leaks. c. test duration.
b. plastic deformation. d. background noise level.
c. growing cracks.
d. rounded inclusions. 10. Background noise can be reduced by:

a. electronic filtering.
3. The total energy loss of a propagating wave is called:
b. using flat response amplifiers.
a. scatter. c. using in-line amplifiers.
b. dispersion. d. using heavier gauge coaxial cable.
c. diffraction.
d. attenuation.

4. The Kaiser effect refers to: Electromagnetic Testing

Topical Outline
a. velocity changes due to temperature changes.
b. low amplitude emissions from aluminum structures.
2.2 Electromagnetic Testing (ET)
c. the behavior where emission from a source will not 2.2.1 Sensors
occur until the previous load is exceeded. 2.2.2 Basic types of equipment; types of readout
d. emissions from dissimilar material interfaces. 2.2.3 Reference standards
2.2.4 Applications and test result interpretation
2.2.4.1 Flaw detection
5. The Felicity effect is useful in evaluating:
2.2.4.2 Conductivity and permeability sorting
2.2.4.3 Thickness gauging
a. fiber-reinforced plastic components.
2.2.4.4 Process control
b. high-alloy castings.
c. large structural steel members.
d. ceramics.
REFERENCES
6. The Kaiser effect is useful in distinguishing: ASNT, 2014, ASNT Level III Study Guide: Electromagnetic Testing, American
Society for Nondestructive Testing, Columbus, OH.

a. electrical noise from mechanical noise. ASNT, 2014, ASNT Questions & Answers Book: Electromagnetic Testing,
American Society for Nondestructive Testing, Columbus, OH.
b. electrical noise from growing discontinuities.
ASNT, 2004, Nondestructive Testing Handbook, Vol. 5: Electromagnetic
c. mechanical noise from growing discontinuities. Testing, third edition, American Society for Nondestructive Testing,
Columbus, OH.
d. electrical noise from continuous emissions.
ASNT, 2018, Electromagnetic Testing Classroom Training Book
(PTP Series), second edition, American Society for Nondestructive
7. The term “counts” refers to the: Testing, Columbus, OH.
ASNT, 2013, Electromagnetic Testing Programmed Instruction Book
a. number of times a signal crosses a preset threshold. (PTP Series), second edition, American Society for Nondestructive
Testing, Columbus, OH.
b. number of events from a source.
c. number of transducers required to perform a test.
d. duration of hold periods.
ET Review Questions 6. The magnetic field generated by eddy currents induced in
a test specimen:
1. Eddy currents are circulating electrical currents induced
a. reinforces the magnetic field that induced the eddy
in conductive materials by:
currents.
a. continuous direct current. b. cancels the magnetic field that induced the eddy
b. gamma rays. currents.
c. an alternating magnetic field. c. opposes the magnetic field that induced the eddy
currents.
d. a piezoelectric force.
d. has no effect on the magnetic field that induced the
2. The method used to generate eddy currents in a test eddy currents.
specimen by means of a coil can most closely be
compared with the action of a: 7. In ET, IACS is a recognized abbreviation for:

a. transformer. a. Induced Alternating Current System.

b. capacitor. b. Inductively Activated Comparison System.
c. storage battery. c. Internal Applied Current System.
d. generator. d. International Annealed Copper Standard.

3. ET relies on the principle of: 8. In ET, the specimen is coupled to the test coil by:

a. magnetostriction. a. core coupling.

b. electromagnetic induction. b. magnetic saturation.
c. piezoelectric energy conversion. c. the coil’s electromagnetic fields.
d. magnetomotive force. d. magnetic domains.

4. When the electrical current in an eddy current coil 9. The penetration of eddy currents in a conductive material
reverses direction, the: is decreased when the:

a. direction of the eddy currents in the test part remains a. test frequency or conductivity of the specimen is
the same. decreased.
b. eddy currents in the test part will change phase b. test frequency is decreased or conductivity of the
by 45°. specimen is increased.
c. direction of the eddy currents in the test part also c. test frequency, conductivity of the specimen, or
reverses. permeability of the specimen is increased.
d. eddy currents in the test part will change phase d. permeability of the specimen is decreased.
by 90°.
10. At a fixed test frequency, in which of the following
5. In order to generate measurable eddy currents in a test materials will the eddy current penetration be greatest?
specimen, the specimen must be:
a. Aluminum (35% IACS conductivity).
a. an electrical conductor. b. Brass (15% IACS conductivity).
b. an electrical insulator. c. Copper (95% IACS conductivity).
c. a ferromagnetic material. d. Lead (7% IACS conductivity).
d. a nonmagnetic material.

55
 |
SECTION II NDT METHODS

11. A term used to describe the effect observed due to a 16. The term “fill factor” applies to:
change in the coupling between a test specimen and a flat
probe coil when the distance of separation between them a. a surface coil.
is varied is: b. coaxial cable.
c. an encircling coil.
a. liftoff.
d. the ability to null an eddy current instrument.
b. fill factor.
c. edge effect. 17. Which of the following materials would be more likely
d. end effect. used as a mounting material for a probe coil?

12. When testing with eddy currents, discontinuities will be a. Aluminum.

most easily detected when the eddy currents are: b. Plastic.
c. Copper.
a. coplanar with the major dimension of the
d. Nonferromagnetic steel.
discontinuity.
b. perpendicular to the major plane of the discontinuity.
18. Which of the following is a commonly used eddy current
c. parallel to the major dimension of the discontinuity. testing read-out mechanism?
d. 90° out of phase with the current in the coil.
a. Signal generator.
13. Which of the following discontinuities is easiest to detect b. Oscilloscope
with an electromagnetic test? (Assume that the area of the c. Electronic visual display.
discontinuity is equal in all four choices listed.)
d. Computer screen connected to eddy current system.
a. A subsurface crack which lies parallel to the direction
of the eddy current. 19. Reference standards used for ET:
b. A discontinuity located in the center of a 51 mm a. must contain artificial discontinuities such as notches
(2 in.) diameter bar. and drilled holes.
c. A radial crack that extends to the outer surface of a b. must contain natural discontinuities such as cracks
51 mm (2 in.) diameter bar. and inclusions.
d. A subsurface radial crack located at a depth of c. must be free of measurable discontinuities, but may
13 mm (0.5 in.) in a 51 mm (2 in.) diameter bar. contain artificial or natural discontinuities, or may be
free of discontinuities, depending on the test system
14. A term used to define the timing relationships involved in and the type of test being conducted.
alternating current signals is:
d. must be constructed from the same material of the
object being inspected.
a. magnitude.
b. phase.
20. Which of the following conditions would be the most difficult
c. impedance. to detect when testing a rod using an encircling coil?
d. time-gain correction.
a. A short surface crack that has a depth of 10% of the
15. The impedance of a test coil can be represented by the rod diameter.
vector sum of: b. A small inclusion in the center of the rod.
c. A 5% change in diameter.
a. inductive reactance and resistance.
d. A 10% change in conductivity.
b. capacitive reactance and resistance.
c. inductive reactance and capacitive reactance. 21. The thickness of nonconductive coatings on a conductive
d. inductive reactance, capacitive reactance, and base can be most simply measured by:
resistance.
a. observing the liftoff effect caused by the coating.
b. testing both sides of the specimen.
c. varying the test frequency over a given range during
the test.
d. using a specially shaped encircling coil.
22. Some of the products commonly tested using encircling 27. For age hardenable aluminum and titanium alloys,
coils are: changes in hardness are indicated by changes in:

a. rods, tubes, and wire. a. retentivity.

b. interior of hollow tubes. b. permeability.
c. sheets and metal foil. c. conductivity.
d. square billets and plates. d. magnetostriction.

23. It is often possible to sort various alloys of a nonmagnetic

metal by means of ET when:
Leak Testing
a. there is a unique range of permeability values for
each alloy. Topical Outline
b. there is a unique range of conductivity values for each
alloy. 2.3 Leak Testing (LT)
2.3.1 Fundamentals
c. the direction of induced eddy currents varies for each 2.3.1.1 Bubble leak testing
alloy. 2.3.1.2 Pressure leak testing
d. the magnetic domains for each alloy are different. 2.3.1.3 Halogen detector leak testing
2.3.1.4 Mass spectrometer leak testing
24. When conducting ET on tubing with a system that 2.3.2 LT procedures, and techniques
2.3.2.1 System factors
includes a frequency discriminating circuit, which of
2.3.2.2 Relative sensitivity
the following variables would be classified as a high-
2.3.2.3 Evacuated systems
frequency variable? 2.3.2.4 Pressurized systems; ambient fluids,
tracer fluids
a. Conductivity changes. 2.3.2.5 Locating leaks
b. Diameter changes. 2.3.2.6 Standardization
c. Wall thickness variations. 2.3.3 Test result interpretation
2.3.4 Essentials of safety
d. Small discontinuities.
2.3.5 Test equipment
2.3.6 Applications
25. Tubing is generally inspected using: 2.3.6.1 Piping and pressure vessels
2.3.6.2 Evacuated systems
a. U-shaped coils. 2.3.6.3 Low-pressure fluid containment vessels,
b. gap coils. pipes, and tubing
2.3.6.4 Hermetic seals
c. encircling coils.
2.3.6.5 Electrical and electronic components
d. a sliding probe.

26. An out-of-phase condition between current and voltage:

REFERENCES
a. can exist in both the primary and secondary windings
ASNT, 2017, Nondestructive Testing Handbook, Vol. 2: Leak Testing, fourth
of an eddy current coil. edition, American Society for Nondestructive Testing, Columbus OH.
b. can exist only in the secondary winding of an eddy ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Level III Study Guide: Leak Testing Method,
current coil. American Society for Nondestructive Testing, Columbus, OH.

c. can exist only in the primary winding of an eddy ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Questions & Answers Book: Bubble Leak Testing,
American Society for Nondestructive Testing, Columbus, OH.
current coil.
ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Questions & Answers Book: Halogen Diode
d. exists only in the test specimen. Detector, American Society for Nondestructive Testing, Columbus, OH.
ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Questions & Answers Book: Mass Spectrom-
eter Testing Method, American Society for Nondestructive Testing,
Columbus, OH.
ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Questions & Answers Book: Pressure Change
Measurement Testing, latest edition, American Society for Nondestructive
Testing, Columbus, OH.
ASNT, 1998, Nondestructive Testing Handbook, Vol. 1: Leak Testing, third
edition, American Society for Nondestructive Testing, Columbus OH.

57
 |
SECTION II NDT METHODS

LT Review Questions 6. Which of the following best describes the type of leak test
used when the interior of the test object is continuously
1. Which of the following systems or components would evacuated during the test and a tracer gas is applied to
require the most precaution and special considerations in the exterior, while the leak detector is connected to the
preparation for a leak test? evacuating system?

a. Piping and pressure vessels. a. Static leak test.

b. Refrigeration piping. b. Helium leak test.
c. Vacuum chambers. c. Dynamic leak test.
d. Sintered material components. d. Halogen leak test.

2. Pressure change leak testing is dependent on three 7. Assuming no significant leakage, if the temperature
variables. A change to any of these three will have a direct increases during a pressure drop leak test in a constant
effect on at least one of the other two variables. These volume system, the pressure in the system under test
three variables are: would:

a. pressure, volume, and pumping speed. a. increase.

b. pressure, volume, and temperature. b. remain the same.
c. volume, temperature, and ambient atmospheric c. decrease.
pressure. d. first decrease, then increase to its former level.
d. temperature, pumping speed, and fluid viscosity.
8. If the sensitivity of the halogen leak detector is constant
3. Which of the following is a technique of LT? throughout a test, and the pre- and post-test calibrations
of the instrument were acceptable, which of the following
a. Static. is true upon completion of the test?
b. Gaseous diffusion.
a. No leaks smaller than a certain size have gone
c. Dynamic. undetected.
d. Detector probe. b. The total leakage rate of the test object is less than a
certain amount.
4. Which of the following LT techniques can reliably
c. The instrument and the test procedure were capable
quantify a leak ≤ 10–7 atm cc/sec in a normal industrial
of detecting leakage of a certain size during the test.
environment?
d. The instrument and test procedure were only capable
a. Bubble leak testing. of detecting leakage of a certain size upstream of the
b. Pressure change leak testing. tracer gas during the test.

c. Mass spectrometer leak testing.

9. All leak detection techniques are dependent upon:
d. Liquid penetrant testing.
a. barometric pressure.
5. Establishing differential pressure between the test object b. oxygen content of the surrounding air.
and the environment is an essential element in which of
c. all of the other gases in the mass spectrometer.
the following NDT methods?
d. establishing a differential pressure across the test
a. X-ray diffraction. boundary.
b. Leak testing.
c. Neutron radiography.
d. Electromagnetic testing.
10. In systems under high vacuum, sensitivity of a pressure 15. In a helium mass spectrometer leak test using the hood
change leak test is dependent not only on the pressure technique, if the inspector has a final calibration 40%
change observed, but also on the degree of outgassing. greater than the preliminary calibration, what would
Outgassing is best defined as: they do?

a. the release of gas from materials in a vacuum. a. Nothing.

b. directly proportional to the temperature of the gas. b. Retest the item.
c. the viscosity of the pressurizing gas. c. Increase test time.
d. the drop in test pressure due to leakage from the d. Increase the helium concentration.
vacuum manifold.

11. What is the essential information that must be recorded to

perform a pressure change leak test? Liquid Penetrant Testing
a. Helium concentration, leak response, background. Topical Outline
b. Barometric pressure, start time, stop time,
temperature. 2.4 Liquid Penetrant Testing (PT)
2.4.1 Fundamentals
c. Temperature, elapsed time, volume, pressure. 2.4.1.1 Interaction of penetrants and
d. Mean free path of helium, fluid viscosity, pressure discontinuity openings
differential. 2.4.1.2 Fluorescence and contrast
2.4.2 PT
12. What is the easiest option for increasing sensitivity in a 2.4.2.1 Penetrant processes
2.4.2.2 Test equipment and systems factors
pressure change leak test?
2.4.2.3 Test result interpretation; discontinuity
indications
a. Change instrumentation.
2.4.2.4 Applications
b. Turn down the thermostat. 2.4.2.4.1 Castings
c. Put the test item in an environmental chamber. 2.4.2.4.2 Welds
d. Increase test time. 2.4.2.4.3 Wrought metals
2.4.2.4.4 Machined parts
2.4.2.4.5 Leaks
13. Performing a helium mass spectrometer hood test, what 2.4.2.4.6 Field inspections
effect would a 50% versus a 100% helium concentration
have on the final leak rate of the item being tested?

a. Increase it.
REFERENCES
b. Decrease it. ASNT, 2016, Nondestructive Testing Handbook, Vol. 1: Liquid Penetrant
c. No change. Testing, fourth edition, American Society for Nondestructive Testing,
Columbus, OH.
d. Make the leak rate unusable.
ASNT, 1999, Nondestructive Testing Handbook, Vol. 2: Liquid Penetrant
Testing, third edition, American Society for Nondestructive Testing,
14. In a pressure change rate of rise test, what test variable is Columbus, OH.
not recorded? ASNT, 2020, Principles and Applications of Liquid Penetrant Testing:
A Classroom Training Text, American Society for Nondestructive Testing,
Columbus, OH.
a. Pressure.
ASNT, 2005, Liquid Penetrant Testing Classroom Training Book, PTP Series,
b. Volume. American Society for Nondestructive Testing, Columbus, OH.
c. Temperature. ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Level II Study Guide: Liquid Penetrant Testing
d. Elapsed time. Method, American Society for Nondestructive Testing, Columbus, OH.
ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Level III Study Guide: Liquid Penetrant Testing
Method, American Society for Nondestructive Testing, Columbus, OH.
ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Questions & Answers Book: Liquid Penetrant
Testing, American Society for Nondestructive Testing, Columbus, OH.

59
 |
SECTION II NDT METHODS

PT Review Questions 6. A red penetrant indication against white background is

most likely to be seen when:
1. The tendency of a liquid penetrant to enter a discontinuity
a. dry developers are used.
is primarily related to:
b. visible dye penetrants are used.
a. the viscosity of the penetrant. c. fluorescent postemulsified penetrants are used.
b. capillary action. d. ultraviolet light is used with visible dye penetrants.
c. the chemical inertness of the penetrant.
d. the specific gravity of the penetrant. 7. The most widely accepted technique for removing excess
water-washable penetrant from the surface of a test
2. PT is a nondestructive test method that can be used for: specimen is by:

a. locating and evaluating all types of discontinuities in a. using a wet rag.

a test specimen. b. using a coarse water spray rinse.
b. locating and determining the length, width, and c. washing the part directly under water running from a
depth of discontinuities in a test specimen. tap.
c. determining the tensile strength of a test specimen. d. immersing the part in water.
d. locating discontinuities open to the surface.
8. Which of the following PT systems is generally considered
3. Which of the following processes is best situated to detect the least sensitive?
shallow discontinuities?
a. Water-washable; visible dye.
a. Postemulsifiable. b. Solvent-removable; visible dye.
b. Solvent-removable. c. Water-washable; fluorescent dye.
c. Aqueous developer. d. Postemulsified; visible dye.
d. Water-washable.
9. When performing PT using solvent-removable visible
4. The property of a dye used in penetrant materials to dye penetrant, there are several ways to remove excess
emit light in the range of wavelengths different from the penetrant from the surface of the part. Which of the
wavelength of visible light that excites the emission is techniques listed below is generally regarded as most
called: suitable for giving accurate test results?

a. emissivity. a. Squirting solvent over the surface with no more than

69 kPa (10 psi) pressure.
b. irradiation.
b. Wiping with a solvent-soaked cloth, then wiping with
c. spectrum blocking.
a dry cloth.
d. fluorescence.
c. Wiping with a solvent-dampened cloth, then wiping
with dry cloths.
5. When using a fluorescent, postemulsifier penetrant, the
length of time the emulsifier is allowed to remain on the d. Wiping with dry cloths, then wiping with a solvent-
part is critical for detecting shallow discontinuities. The dampened cloth, and finally wiping with a dry cloth.
optimum length of time should be:
10. A problem with retesting a specimen that has been
a. 10 seconds. previously tested using PT is that the:
b. 5 seconds.
a. penetrant residue left in discontinuities may not
c. 2 to 3 minutes. readily dissolve, and the retest may be misleading.
d. determined by experimentation. b. penetrant may form beads on the surface.
c. penetrant will lose a great deal of its color brilliance.
d. added penetrant will intensify the penetrant residue,
making indications larger than normal.
11. A commonly used method of checking the overall 16. In PT, scattered round indications on the surface of a part
performance of a liquid penetrant material system is to: could be indicative of:

a. determine the viscosity of the penetrant. a. fatigue cracks.

b. measure the wettability of the penetrant. b. porosity.
c. compare two sections of artificially cracked c. weld laps.
specimens. d. hot tears.
d. check the penetrant contaminant levels.
17. Which of the following are typical nonrelevant indications
12. The function of emulsifier in the postemulsified penetrant found in PT?
process is to:
a. Indications due to part geometry or part design
a. influence the rate of penetration into deep, tight configurations.
cracks. b. Nonmagnetic indications.
b. react with the surface penetrant to make the c. Indications due to contact with another test object.
penetrant water washable.
d. Indications on low-stressed areas of the part.
c. add fluorescent dye or pigment to the penetrant.
d. emulsify surface oils and greases to facilitate their 18. Which of the statements below best states the effects of
removal. sandblasting for the cleaning of surfaces to be tested
with PT?
13. Which of the following statements most applies to
developers used during PT? a. Surface discontinuities may be closed.
b. Oil contaminants might be sealed in the
a. Developers are normally highly fluorescent. discontinuities.
b. Some developers furnish a fluctuating background c. The sand used in the sandblasting operation may be
during inspection. forced into the discontinuity.
c. Developers absorb or blot the penetrant that remains d. The sandblasting operation may introduce
in discontinuities after the excess penetrant has been discontinuities into the part.
removed.
d. Nonaqueous developers are better suited for very 19. The penetrant indication of a forging lap will normally
humid environments. be a:

14. The penetrant indication for a cold shut on the surface of a a. round or nearly round indication.
casting will normally be: b. cluster of indications.
c. thin continuous line.
a. a dotted line.
d. dotted line.
b. a large bulbous indication.
c. a smooth continuous line. 20. Aluminum alloy test specimens that have been tested with
d. undetectable since cold shuts are closed over on the PT should be thoroughly cleaned after testing because:
surface.
a. acid in the penetrant may cause severe corrosion.
15. A crack-type discontinuity will generally appear as: b. the oily residue from the test will severely inhibit the
application of paint on aluminum alloys.
a. a rounded indication.
c. a chemical reaction between the penetrant and
b. a continuous line, either straight or jagged. aluminum could cause a fire.
c. a broad, fuzzy indication. d. the alkalines in wet developers and most emulsifiers
d. random round or elongated holes. could cause surface pitting, particularly in moist
atmospheres.

61
 |
SECTION II NDT METHODS

21. Which of the following is a discontinuity that might be 25. A penetrant must:
found in rolled bar stock?
a. change viscosity in order to spread over the surface of
a. Blow holes. the part.
b. Shrinkage laps. b. spread easily over the surface of the material.
c. Stringers or seams. c. have a low flash point.
d. Insufficient penetration. d. be able to change color in order to fluoresce.

22. Anodized surfaces are usually considered poor candidates 26. Which of the following discontinuities could be classified
for high-sensitivity PT because the anodizing process as an in-service related discontinuity?
produces a conversion layer that:
a. Grinding cracks.
a. is extremely smooth and slick. b. Porosity.
b. has a multitude of extremely small pores. c. Stress-corrosion crack.
c. may have alkaline residue that “quenches” the d. Cold lap.
penetrant.
d. cannot be cleaned by ordinary processes. 27. Penetrant materials are tested and qualified to what
specification?
23. Which of the following PT techniques is best suited for
performing inspections without a source of electricity? a. AMS 2642
b. AMS 2644
a. Water-washable fluorescent penetrant.
c. AMS 2646
b. Postemulsified fluorescent penetrant.
d. AMS 2648
c. Visible dye penetrant.
d. Hydrophilic fluorescent penetrant. 28. Which of the following penetrants is able to be removed
with water?
24. Which of the following statements is true concerning PT of
welds with rough surfaces? a. Method A penetrant.
b. Method B penetrant.
a. The postemulsified process offers advantages over the
c. Method C penetrant.
water-washable process.
d. Method D penetrant.
b. If the solvent removal process is used, the best
developer would be an aqueous suspension.
29. Fluorescent dye penetrant is typically which color?
c. Welds with rough surfaces cannot be successfully
tested by any PT technique. a. Red.
d. Welds with rough surfaces may need to be ground b. Yellow-green.
smooth prior to PT. c. Orange.
d. Blue.
 3. What type of discontinuity would not typically be
Magnetic Flux Leakage Testing indicated by MFL techniques?
Topical Outline
a. Laps.
2.11 Magnetic Flux Leakage Testing (MFL) b. Pitting with cracking.
2.11.1 Fundamentals c. Deep-surface discontinuities.
2.11.1.1 Magnetic field principles
d. Longitudinal seams.
2.11.1.2 Magnetization by means of electric current
2.11.1.3 Flux leakage
2.11.2 MFL 4. The strength of the magnetic field in the interior of a coil is
2.11.2.1 Basic types of equipment and inspection determined by the:
materials
2.11.2.2 Types of discontinuities found by MFL a. number of turns in the coil only.
2.11.2.3 Sensors used in MFL b. strength of applied current only.
2.11.3 Applications
c. number of turns in the coil and the strength of the
2.11.3.1 Wire rope inspection
applied current.
2.11.3.2 Pipe body inspection
2.11.3.3 Tank floor/steel plate inspection d. direction of applied current in the coil.

5. The current used for magnetization when performing MFL

must be a:
REFERENCES
ASNT, 2008, Nondestructive Testing Handbook, Vol. 8: Magnetic Testing, third a. steady nonfluctuating current.
edition, American Society for Nondestructive Testing, Columbus, OH. b. current that reverses direction at an inconsistent rate.
ASNT, 2010, Nondestructive Testing Handbook, Vol. 5: Electromagnetic Testing, c. current that fluctuates on and off at a consistent rate.
third edition, American Society for Nondestructive Testing, Columbus, OH.
ASNT, 2010, MFL Compendium: Articles on Magnetic Flux Leakage, American
d. current that varies based on the thickness of the
Society for Nondestructive Testing, Columbus, OH. material.
ASNT, 2009, Supplement to Recommended Practice SNT-TC-1A: Electromag-
netic Testing Method Questions & Answers Book, second edition, American 6. As a general rule, hard (high-strength) ferromagnetic
Society for Nondestructive Testing, Columbus, OH.
materials have:

MFL Review Questions a. high coercive force and are easily demagnetized.
b. high coercive force and are not easily demagnetized.
1. In MFL inspection for discontinuities using an active field,
c. low coercive force and are easily demagnetized.
the part being inspected should be magnetized:
d. low coercive force and are not easily demagnetized.
a. beyond saturation.
b. to saturation or near saturation. 7. In MFL, the greatest tube wall thickness for which
maximum sensitivity can be maintained is:
c. well below saturation.
d. near the point of maximum permeability. a. 0.08 mm (0.003 in.)
b. 0.8 mm (0.03 in.)
2. An advantage that MFL has in comparison with ET is that
c. 8 mm (0.318 in.)
MFL is:
d. 76 mm (3 in.)
a. less sensitive to interferences caused by surface
roughness.
b. useful on products at temperatures above the curie
point.
c. useful on austenitic steels.
d. easier to use on ferromagnetic materials.

63
 |
SECTION II NDT METHODS

8. In the examination of aboveground storage tanks where 14. The direction of magnetic lines of force are generally
the flux sensor is on the top surface: considered to be _____ from the direction of current flow.

a. only top surface discontinuities are detected. a. 45°

b. only bottom surface discontinuities are detected. b. 90°
c. both top and bottom surface discontinuities can be c. 180°
detected and can generally be distinguished from d. 270°
each other.
d. both top and bottom surface discontinuities can be 15. If the sensor bounces along the surface of aboveground
detected but generally cannot be distinguished from storage tanks, it may:
each other.
a. make it difficult to estimate the severity of an
9. Materials that are weakly repelled magnetically are called: indication.
b. generate noise in the signal.
a. diamagnetic.
c. decrease the speed of the inspection.
b. nonmagnetic.
d. distort the magnetizing system.
c. paramagnetic.
d. ferromagnetic. 16. In an MFL examination of aboveground storage tanks, the
factor(s) that must be considered when interpreting an
10. A break in the magnetic uniformity of a part that is called a indication is/are:
magnetic discontinuity is related to a sudden change in:
a. signal amplitude only.
a. resistivity. b. signal width only.
b. inductance. c. visual and ultrasonic evaluation.
c. permeability. d. signal amplitude and width.
d. capacitance.
17. In the application of pipe body inspection, longitudinal
11. A hysteresis curve describes the relation between: magnetization is best for detection of:

a. magnetizing force and flux density. a. longitudinal discontinuities.

b. magnetizing force and applied current. b. transverse discontinuities.
c. strength of magnetism and alignment of domains c. internal surface discontinuities.
within material. d. subsurface discontinuities.
d. magnetic flux density and the current generated.
18. Residual magnetization is the:
12. When inspecting wire rope, a magnetic flux loop is used to
monitor: a. magnetizing force remaining after flux density has
decreased.
a. broken external wires. b. residual magnetizing force beyond the curie point.
b. broken internal wires. c. flux density after removal of magnetizing force.
c. changes in inspection speed. d. flux density beyond the level of saturation.
d. reductions in cross-sectional area.

13. A hall effect probe measures:

a. permeability.
b. conductivity.
c. flux density perpendicular to the probe surface.
d. tangential field strength.
 3. Magnetic lines of force (magnetic fields) are oriented
Magnetic Particle Testing in what direction in relation to the direction of the
Topical Outline magnetizing current?

2.5 Magnetic Particle Testing (MT)

a. Parallel.
2.5.1 Fundamentals b. At right angles.
2.5.1.1 Magnetic field principles c. At a 45° angle.
2.5.1.2 Magnetization by means of electric
d. At random angles.
current
2.5.1.3 Demagnetization
2.5.2 MT 4. “Magnetizing flux” is a term that relates to:
2.5.2.1 Basic types of equipment and inspection
materials a. the direction of current flow in an electromagnet.
2.5.2.2 Test results interpretation; discontinuity b. the manner by which magnetism flows through
indications space.
2.5.2.3 Applications
c. the lines of force associated with a magnetic field.
2.5.2.3.1 Welds
2.5.2.3.2 Castings d. permanent magnets only.
2.5.2.3.3 Wrought metals
2.5.2.3.4 Machined parts 5. Subjecting a part to a magnetic field that is constantly
2.5.2.3.5 Field applications reversing in polarity and gradually diminishing in strength
accomplishes which of the following?

a. Demagnetizes the part.

REFERENCES b. Magnetizes the part.
ASNT, 2008, Nondestructive Testing Handbook, Vol. 8: Magnetic Particle
c. Increases the residual magnetism.
Testing, third edition, American Society for Nondestructive Testing,
Columbus, OH. d. Locates deep-lying discontinuities.
ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Level II Study Guide: Magnetic Particle Testing
Method, American Society for Nondestructive Testing, Columbus, OH.
6. Circular magnetization is useful in the detection of:
ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Level III Study Guide: Magnetic Particle Testing
Method, American Society for Nondestructive Testing, Columbus, OH.
a. circumferential cracks.
ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Questions & Answers Book: Magnetic
Particle Testing Method, American Society for Nondestructive Testing,
b. longitudinal cracks.
Columbus, OH. c. cracks in cylindrical parts at right angles to the long
ASNT, 2015, Magnetic Particle Testing Classroom Training Book, PTP Series, axis of the part.
American Society for Nondestructive Testing, Columbus, OH.
d. deep-lying discontinuities.

MT Review Questions 7. In which magnetizing method is the current passed

directly through the part, thereby setting up a magnetic
1. Which of the following materials is considered field at right angles to the current flow?
nonferrous?
a. Longitudinal magnetization.
a. Copper alloys. b. Coil magnetization.
b. High alloy steels. c. Central conductor magnetization.
c. Tool steels. d. Circular magnetization.
d. Ferritic stainless steels.
8. Which of the following is a major disadvantage of using
2. Materials that are strongly attracted to a magnet are called: prods?

a. magnetized. a. The magnetic field may be applied in the wrong

direction.
b. nonmagnetic.
b. The inspection surface may be arc burned.
c. ferromagnetic.
c. Magnetic saturation may occur.
d. magnetic.
d. Control of the amperage.

65
 |
SECTION II NDT METHODS

9. Inspecting a part by applying the wet magnetic particle 15. What causes a leakage field in a steel bar?
suspension while the current is flowing is called the:
a. Paint on the bar surface.
a. continuous method. b. A longitudinal crack.
b. dry method. c. Reversal of the magnetic field.
c. residual method. d. Hysteresis.
d. demagnetization method.
16. MT techniques are recognized as superior to liquid
10. How is the inside diameter of a cylinder best magnetized? penetrant testing techniques when the:

a. By a head shot. a. surfaces of the test object are corroded.

b. By using prods at either end. b. surface is anodized.
c. With a central conductor placed between contact c. parts are painted.
heads. d. part is made from austenitic steel.
d. With the cylinder placed crosswise in a solenoid.
17. When using direct current, an indication is detected.
11. The amount of amperage used for MT using prods is based What is the next logical step to determine if the indication
on the distance between the prods and the: results from a surface or subsurface condition?

a. thickness of the part. a. Reinspect using the surge method.

b. length of the prods. b. Demagnetize and apply powder.
c. diameter of the prods. c. Reinspect at higher amperage.
d. total length of the part. d. Reinspect using alternating current.

12. Demagnetization of a part is usually necessary if the part 18. A requirement to use MT on a part should also include:
is:
a. a fabrication and service manual.
a. made of stainless steel. b. a statement on the drawing that requires MT.
b. is a nonferromagnetic steel. c. the procedure to be used and acceptance criteria.
c. high-carbon steel to be welded after inspection. d. the method of test and service conditions.
d. to be hardened by heat treatment after inspection.
19. The reverse magnetizing force necessary to remove a
13. Which of the following is an advantage of the dry residual magnetic field from a test piece after it has been
technique over the wet technique? magnetically saturated is called:

a. It is more sensitive for detecting fine surface cracks. a. coercive force.

b. It is more capable of providing full surface coverage b. demagnetizing flux.
on irregularly shaped parts. c. reverse saturation.
c. It is easier to use for field inspection with portable d. direct force.
equipment.
d. It is faster when testing many small parts. 20. The best type of magnetizing current for inspection of
fatigue cracks is:
14. Fluorescent magnetic particles are used in preference over
visible magnetic particles: a. direct current.
b. alternating current.
a. when parts are big and bulky.
c. half-wave rectified alternating current.
b. when working in the field.
d. full-wave current.
c. if parts are for railroad applications.
d. to increase the speed and reliability of detecting very
small discontinuities.
21. A star-shaped indication is seen on the cover pass of a 27. The strength of a magnetic field induced in a part is often
weld. What type of discontinuity is indicated? referred to as:

a. Crater crack. a. retentivity.

b. Cooling crack. b. current density.
c. Slag inclusion. c. voltage.
d. Arc burn. d. flux density.

22. For maximum sensitivity in MT of rough welds:

a. the weld should be wire brushed to remove slag and Neutron Radiographic Testing
scale.
Topical Outline
b. standard test weldments should be used for
comparison.
2.6 Neutron Radiographic Testing (NR)
c. the weld bead should be coated with lacquer.
2.6.1 Fundamentals
d. the weld bead should be ground to remove surface 2.6.1.1 Sources
irregularities. 2.6.1.1.1 Isotopic
2.6.1.1.2 Neutron
23. Ferromagnetic materials are made up of small, polarized 2.6.1.2 Detectors
regions known as: 2.6.1.2.1 Imaging
2.6.1.2.2 Nonimaging
a. photons. 2.6.1.3 Nature of penetrating radiation and
interactions with matter
b. quarks. 2.6.1.4 Essentials of safety
c. electrons. 2.6.2 NR
d. domains. 2.6.2.1 Basic imaging considerations
2.6.2.2 Test result interpretation; discontinuity
indications
24. The reapplication of magnetic particle suspension after
2.6.2.3 Systems factors (source/test object/
current has already been applied to a part is known as the: detector interactions)
2.6.2.4 Applications
a. residual method. 2.6.2.4.1 Explosives and pyrotechnic
b. continuous method. devices
c. magnetization method. 2.6.2.4.2 Assembled components
2.6.2.4.3 Bonded components
d. demagnetization method.
2.6.2.4.4 Corrosion detection
2.6.2.4.5 Nonmetallic materials
25. Subsurface indications will have the appearance of:

a. well-defined lines.
b. fuzzy-looking lines. REFERENCES
c. bright, solid lines. ASNT, 2002, Nondestructive Testing Handbook, Vol. 4: Radiographic Testing,
third edition, American Society for Nondestructive Testing, Columbus, OH.
d. intermittent lines.
ASNT, 2019, Nondestructive Testing Handbook, Vol. 3: Radiographic Testing,
fourth edition, American Society for Nondestructive Testing, Columbus, OH.
26. The areas on a magnetized part from which the magnetic
ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Questions & Answers Book: Neutron Radiographic
field is leaving or returning into the part are called: Testing Method, American Society for Nondestructive Testing, Columbus,
OH.
a. defects.
b. salient points.
c. magnetic poles.
d. nodes.

67
 |
SECTION II NDT METHODS

NR Review Questions 7. The primary radiation mechanism for darkening

radiographic film when the direct NR process is used with
1. The highest intensity sources of thermal neutrons are: gadolinium screens is:

a. Cf-252 isotopes. a. alpha particles.

b. accelerators. b. electrons.
c. nuclear fission reactors. c. gamma rays.
d. cosmic radiation. d. light emission.

2. Neutrons for fast-neutron radiography are obtainable 8. NR using the transfer method requires that the imaging
from: screen must:

a. accelerators. a. be placed behind the film.

b. Co-60 or Ir-192. b. be placed in front of the film.
c. moderated neutrons from reactors. c. be very thin.
d. X-ray machines. d. become radioactive.

3. A radioactive source used for NR is: 9. Which of the following NR converter foils cannot be used
for transfer or indirect radiography?
a. Cf-252.
a. Dysprosium.
b. Pu-239.
b. Indium.
c. Co-60.
c. Gadolinium.
d. Cs-137.
d. Gold.
4. The energy of the neutron is expressed in which of the
following units of measurement? 10. The most suitable films for producing neutron radiographs
are:
a. Curies (becquerels).
a. industrial X-ray films.
b. Röntgen (coulombs per kilogram).
b. red-sensitive films.
c. Rem (sieverts).
c. instant-type films.
d. Electronvolts.
d. emulsions that contain no silver halides.
5. A normally desirable feature of a thermal neutron beam
for NR is: 11. Materials that are exposed to thermal neutron beams:

a. background gamma radiation intensity. a. must not be handled for at least 3 min after exposure
has ceased.
b. relatively low fast-neutron intensity.
b. must be stored in a lead-lined room.
c. low angular divergence.
c. should be monitored by means of a neutron counter.
d. relatively high thermal neutron intensity.
d. may be radioactive after exposure to neutrons has
6. A material that slows down neutrons is called: ceased.

a. a moderator. 12. Lead is:

b. an accumulator.
a. a good neutron shield.
c. a limitor.
b. corroded by neutron exposures.
d. a collimator.
c. a relatively poor neutron absorber.
d. an efficient conversion screen.
13. If 2 mm (0.08 in.) of plastic attenuates a thermal neutron 19. The transfer exposure method is used because:
beam by a factor of 2, then 20 mm (0.8 in.) will attenuate it
by approximately a factor of: a. it is not influenced by gamma radiation in the
primary beam.
a. 10. b. it produces greater radiographic sensitivity than
b. 20. direct exposure using gadolinium.
c. 200. c. it is faster than the direct exposure method.
d. 1000. d. the screens used in this method emit only internal
conversion electrons of about 70 keV.
14. Materials in common usage for moderation of fast-
neutron sources include: 20. Higher resolution can be achieved in direct NR by:

a. aluminum, magnesium, and tin. a. placing a lead intensifying screen between a

b. water, plastic, paraffin, and graphite. gadolinium screen and the film.
c. neon, argon, and xenon. b. increasing the length-to-diameter ratio of the
collimation system.
d. tungsten, cesium, antimony, and columbium.
c. increasing the exposure time.
15. The main reason for using NR in place of X-radiography is: d. increasing the distance between the object and the
film cassette.
a. a lower cost.
b. higher resolution. 21. The primary advantage of using a Cf-252 source for
c. the ability to image objects and materials not possible NR is its:
with X-rays.
a. portability.
d. it is a simpler radiographic procedure when required
b. low cost per unit neutron flux compared to other
than X-radiography.
neutron radiographic sources.

16. A photographic record produced by the passage of c. high resolution.

neutrons through a specimen onto a film is called: d. long useful life.

a. a fluoroscopic image. 22. Quality of the results from a neutron radiographic

b. an isotopic reproduction. exposure is best determined by:
c. a radiograph.
a. reference standards.
d. a track-etch photograph.
b. image quality indicators.

17. Many of the absorption differences between neutrons and c. neutron flux measurement.
X-rays indicate that the two techniques: d. densitometer readings.

a. cause radiation problems. 23. The radiographic image of apparent discontinuities

b. complement each other. in the imaging screens can be separated from actual
c. can be used interchangeably. discontinuities in a part being radiographed by:
d. can both be used to image hydrogenous materials
a. comparing a neutron radiograph of the parts to a
equally well.
blank neutron radiograph of the same imaging screen
with no parts in place.
18. The penetrating ability of a thermal neutron beam is
b. producing a photographic copy of the original
governed by:
neutron radiograph using X-ray duplicating film.
a. attenuating characteristics of the material being c. increasing the exposure time of the radiograph.
penetrated. d. decreasing the temperature of the developer solution.
b. exposure time.
c. source-to-film distance.
d. thickness of the converter screen.

69
 |
SECTION II NDT METHODS

24. For inspection of radioactive objects or those that emit Radiographic Testing
gamma radiation when bombarded with neutrons, a
preferable detection technique is the:
Topical Outline

a. direct exposure technique. 2.7 Radiographic Testing (RT)

b. transfer technique. 2.7.1 Fundamentals
2.7.1.1 Sources
c. isotopic reproduction technique. 2.7.1.2 Detectors
d. electrostatic-belt generator technique. 2.7.1.2.1 Imaging
2.7.1.2.2 Nonimaging
25. NR is an excellent tool for determining: 2.7.1.3 Nature of penetrating radiation and
interactions with matter
a. the coating thickness of aluminum oxide on anodized 2.7.1.4 Essentials of safety
aluminum. 2.7.2 RT
2.7.2.1 Basic imaging considerations
b. the size of voids in thick steel castings. 2.7.2.2 Test result interpretation; discontinuity
c. the integrity of thin plastic material within a steel indications
housing. 2.7.2.3 Systems factors (source/test object/
d. tungsten inclusions in gas tungsten arc welding detector interactions)
2.7.2.4 Applications
welds.
2.7.2.4.1 Castings
2.7.2.4.2 Welds
26. NR extends radiographic capability for detecting cracks in 2.7.2.4.3 Assemblies
small cylinders of: 2.7.2.4.4 Electronic components
2.7.2.4.5 Field inspections
a. aluminum.
b. iron.
c. magnesium.
d. plutonium. REFERENCES
ASNT, 2019, Nondestructive Testing Handbook, Vol. 3: Radiographic Testing,
27. Which of the following is a preferred application of NR? fourth edition, American Society for Nondestructive Testing, Columbus, OH.
ASNT, 2016, Radiographic Testing Classroom Training Book (PTP
a. Detection of tungsten inclusions in titanium ingots. Series), second edition, American Society for Nondestructive Testing,
Columbus, OH.
b. Detecting the presence of water in the cells of
ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Level II Study Guide: Radiographic Testing
stainless steel honeycomb. Method, American Society for Nondestructive Testing, Columbus, OH.
c. Detecting slag inclusions in structural steel welds. ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Level III Study Guide: Radiographic Testing
Method, American Society for Nondestructive Testing, Columbus, OH.
d. Determination of the depth of seating of a projectile
ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Questions & Answers Book: Radiographic Testing
in a metallic case.
Method, American Society for Nondestructive Testing, Columbus, OH.
ASNT, 2009, ASNT Study Guide: Industrial Radiography Radiation Safety.
28. Common sources of neutrons for NR are: American Society for Nondestructive Testing, Columbus, OH.
ASNT, 2012, Programmed Instruction Series: Radiographic Testing (PTP
a. electron linear accelerators. Series), Volume I: Physics and Principles, American Society for Nondestruc-
b. isotopes of cobalt (e.g., Co-60). tive Testing, Columbus, OH.*
ASNT, 2012, Programmed Instruction Series: Radiographic Testing (PTP
c. nuclear reactors. Series), Volume II: Safety. American Society for Nondestructive Testing,
d. betatrons. Columbus, OH.*
ASNT, 2012 Programmed Instruction Series: Radiographic Testing (PTP
Series), Volume III: Making a Radiograph, American Society for Nondestruc-
tive Testing, Columbus, OH.*
ASNT, 2012, Programmed Instruction Series: Radiographic Testing (PTP
Series), Volume IV: Processing and Imaging, American Society for Nonde-
structive Testing, Columbus, OH.*
ASNT, 2012, Programmed Instruction Series: Radiographic Testing (PTP
Series), Volume V: Radiographic Interpretation, American Society for Nonde-
structive Testing, Columbus, OH.*
*Available only as part of five-volume set.
RT Review Questions 7. The difference between the densities of two areas of a
radiograph is called:
1. The penetrating ability of an X-ray beam is governed by:
a. radiographic contrast.
a. kilovoltage or wavelength (energy). b. subject contrast.
b. time. c. film contrast.
c. milliamperage. d. definition.
d. source-to-film distance.
8. The fact that gases, when bombarded by radiation, ionize
2. Two X-ray machines operating at the same nominal and become electrical conductors makes them useful in:
kilovoltage and milliamperage settings:
a. X-ray transformers.
a. will produce the same intensities and energies of b. fluoroscopes.
radiation. c. masks.
b. will produce the same intensities but may produce d. radiation detection equipment.
different energies of radiation.
c. will produce the same energies but may produce 9. The reason exposure time must be increased by a factor of
different intensities of radiation. four when the source-to-film distance is doubled is that
d. may give not only different intensities but also the:
different energies of radiation.
a. intensity of radiation decreases at an exponential rate
when the source-to-film distance is increased.
3. Short wavelength electromagnetic radiation produced
during the disintegration of nuclei of radioactive b. energy of radiation is inversely proportional to the
substances is called: square root of the distance from the source to the
film.
a. X-radiation. c. intensity of radiation is inversely proportional to the
b. gamma radiation. square of the distance from the source to the film.
c. scatter radiation. d. scattered radiation effect is greater as the
d. beta radiation. source-to-film distance increases.

4. Almost all gamma radiography is performed with: 10. The most important factor in X-ray absorption of a
specimen is:
a. natural isotopes.
a. the thickness of the specimen.
b. artificially produced isotopes.
b. the density of the specimen.
c. radium.
c. Young’s modulus of the material.
d. Co-60.
d. the atomic number of the material.
5. The energy of gamma rays is expressed by which of the
following units of measurement? 11. The maximum permissible dose per calendar year is 5 rem
(0.05 Sv) for:
a. Curie (gigabecquerel).
a. extremities.
b. Röntgen (coulomb per kilogram).
b. skin.
c. Half-life.
c. whole body (total effective dose equivalent).
d. Kiloelectronvolts (keV) or megaelectronvolts (MeV).
d. a fetus from occupational exposure of a declared
6. Of the following, the source providing the most pregnant woman.
penetrating radiation is:

a. Co-60.
b. 220 kVp X-ray tube.
c. 15 MeV betatron.
d. electrons from Ir-192.

71
 |
SECTION II NDT METHODS

12. Exposure to small doses of X-rays or gamma rays: 18. In film radiography, IQIs are usually placed:

a. has a cumulative effect that must be considered when a. between the intensifying screen and the film.
monitoring for maximum permissible dose. b. on the source side of the test object.
b. is beneficial because it serves to build an immunity in c. on the film side of the test object.
humans to radiation poisoning.
d. between the operator and the radiation source.
c. will have no effect on human beings.
d. will have only a short-term effect on human tissues. 19. At voltages above 400 kV, the use of lead to provide
protection may present serious structural problems. If
13. Which of the following technique variables is most this should be the case, which of the following materials
commonly used to adjust subject contrast? would most likely be used as a substitute?

a. Source-to-film distance. a. Concrete.

b. Milliamperage. b. Aluminum.
c. Kilovoltage. c. Steel.
d. Focal spot size. d. Boron.

14. A basic difference between a radiograph and a 20. A distinctive characteristic of megavolt radiography is that
fluoroscopic image is: it:

a. the fluoroscopic image is more sensitive. a. results in comparatively high subject contrast.
b. the fluoroscopic image is positive whereas the b. results in comparatively high radiographic contrast.
radiographic image is negative. c. is applicable to comparatively thick or highly
c. the fluoroscopic image is brighter. absorbing specimens.
d. there is no basic difference between the two. d. is utilized for stainless steels only.

15. Thin sheets of lead foil in intimate contact with X-ray film 21. Given the radiographic equivalency factors of 1.4 for
during exposure increase film density because they: InconelTM and 1.0 for 304 stainless steel, what is the
approximate equivalent thickness of InconelTM to produce
a. fluoresce and emit visible light, which helps expose the same exposure as a 3.8 mm (0.15 in.) thickness of
the film. 304 stainless steel?
b. absorb the scattered radiation.
a. 3 mm (0.11 in.)
c. prevent backscattered radiation from fogging the film.
b. 9 mm (0.35 in.)
d. emit electrons when exposed to X- and gamma
radiation, which helps to darken the film. c. 18 mm (0.7 in.)
d. 36 mm (1.4 in.)
16. When viewing a radiograph, an image of the back of the
cassette superimposed on the image of the specimen is 22. The fact that each solid crystalline substance produces its
noted. This is most likely due to: own characteristic X-ray pattern is the basis for:

a. undercut. a. xeroradiography.
b. overexposure. b. X-ray diffraction testing.
c. X-ray intensity being too high. c. fluoroscopic testing.
d. backscatter radiation. d. polymorphic testing.

17. An image quality indicator (IQI) is used to measure the: 23. When inspecting a light metal casting by fluoroscopy,
which of the following discontinuities would most likely
a. size of discontinuities in a part. be detected?
b. density of the film.
a. Copper shrinkage.
c. quality of the radiographic technique.
b. Microshrinkage.
d. amount of radiation that penetrates the test object.
c. Shrinkage.
d. Fine cracks.
24. For testing a 25 mm (1 in.) steel plate 305 mm (12 in.) Thermal/Infrared Testing
square for laminar discontinuities, which of the following
would be most effective?
Topical Outline

a. 3.7 TBq (100 Ci) of Ir-192. 2.8 Thermal/Infrared Testing (IR)

b. 925 GBq (25 Ci) of Co-60. 2.8.1 Fundamentals
2.8.1.1 Principles and theory of IR
c. 250 kVp X-ray machine. 2.8.1.2 Temperature measurement principles
d. An ultrasonic device. 2.8.1.3 Proper selection of IR technique
2.8.2 Equipment/materials
25. A critical weld was made with a double vee-groove. 2.8.2.1 Temperature measurement equipment
Among those listed, which radiographic technique 2.8.2.2 Heat flux indicators
2.8.2.3 Noncontact devices
would provide coverage with the greatest probability for
2.8.2.4 Contact temperature indicators
detecting the most serious discontinuities?
2.8.2.5 Noncontact pyrometers
2.8.2.6 Line scanners
a. A single exposure centered on the weld and
2.8.2.7 Thermal imaging
perpendicular to the principal surface of the plate. 2.8.3 Applications
b. Two exposures aligned with the vee-groove, focus 2.8.3.1 Exothermic or endothermic
±30° off perpendicular. investigations
c. Two exposures, perpendicular to the plate, offset by 2.8.3.2 Friction investigations
2.8.3.3 Fluid flow investigations
the width of the weld bead.
2.8.3.4 Thermal resistance investigations
d. A single exposure centered on the weld with two 2.8.3.5 Thermal capacitance investigations
films aligned ±30° off perpendicular to the principal 2.8.4 Interpretation and evaluation
surface of the plate.

26. A fuse assembly is radiographed so that measurements

can be made on the film to determine a minimum internal
REFERENCES
clearance dimension. What should be factored into the
ASNT, 2001, Nondestructive Testing Handbook, Vol. 3: Infrared and Thermal
dimension taken from the film? Testing, third edition, American Society for Nondestructive Testing,
Columbus, OH.
a. Projection magnification. ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Level III Study Guide: Infrared and Thermal
b. Film latitude. Testing, American Society for Nondestructive Testing, Columbus, OH.

c. Slope of the characteristic curve. ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Questions & Answers Book: Thermal & Infrared
Testing Method, latest edition, American Society for Nondestructive Testing,
d. IQI alignment. Columbus, OH.
Wolfe, W.L. and G.J. Ziessis, eds., 1985, The Infrared Handbook, The Envi-
27. Miniature electronic components are to be ronmental Research Institute of Michigan (prepared for The Department of
the Navy).
radiographically inspected to reveal broken copper
wire leads of 0.008 in. (0.2 mm) diameter. Which of
Thermal/Infrared Testing Review Questions
the following IQIs would be most effective to use in
establishing a reliable technique?
1. Thermal resistance is:
a. A series of steel plaque-type IQIs ranging in thickness
from 0.1 mm (0.005 in.) to 0.4 mm (0.015 in.), a. analogous to electrical current.
containing 1T, 2T, and 4T holes. b. a material’s impedance to heat flow.
b. A plastic block with the radiographic thickness c. proportional to the fourth power of emissivity.
equivalent of the test objects, containing precision- d. proportional to the rate of heat flow.
drilled holes ranging from 0.1 mm (0.005 in.) to
0.4 mm (0.015 in.) diameter. 2. Conductive heat transfer can take place:
c. A plastic block with the radiographic thickness
equivalent of the test objects, containing copper wires a. across a vacuum.
ranging from 0.1 mm (0.005 in.) to 0.4 mm (0.015 in.) b. from a hair dryer blowing on an object.
diameter. c. between a heat lamp and a distant object.
d. A series of copper shims ranging in thickness from d. between dissimilar metals in contact with each other.
0.1 mm (0.005 in.) to 0.4 mm (0.015 in.), containing
1/2T and 1T holes.

73
 |
SECTION II NDT METHODS

3. The infrared/thermal energy emitted from a target surface: 9. The spectral band in which glass transmits infrared
radiation most efficiently is the:
a. occurs only in a vacuum.
b. is inversely proportional to surface emissivity. a. 3 to 6 µm region.
c. is proportional to the fourth power of the absolute b. 2 to 3 µm region.
surface temperature. c. 6 to 9 µm region.
d. is totally absorbed by water vapor in the air. d. 9 to 11 µm region.

4. Thermal radiation reaching the surface of a thermally 10. Infrared thermal detectors:
opaque object will only be:
a. have a broad, flat spectral response.
a. absorbed by the surface. b. have much faster response times than photon
b. absorbed and reflected by the surface. detectors.
c. reflected by the surface. c. usually require cooling to operate properly.
d. transmitted and absorbed by the surface. d. have much greater sensitivity than photon detectors.

5. The following spectral band is included in the infrared 11. A diffuse reflecting surface is:
spectrum:
a. a polished surface that reflects incoming energy at a
a. 0.1 to 5.5 µm complementary angle.
b. 0.3 to 10.6 µm b. a surface that scatters reflected energy in many
c. 0.4 to 20 µm directions.
d. 0.75 to 100 µm c. also called a specular reflecting surface.
d. highly transparent to infrared radiation.
6. As a surface cools, the peak of its radiated infrared energy:
12. The minimum resolvable temperature difference is a
a. shifts to longer wavelengths. subjective measurement that depends on:
b. shifts to shorter wavelengths.
a. the infrared imaging system’s spatial resolution only.
c. remains constant if emissivity remains constant.
b. the infrared imaging system’s measurement
d. remains constant even if emissivity varies.
resolution only.

7. A graybody surface with an emissivity of 0.04 would be: c. the infrared imaging system’s thermal sensitivity and
spatial resolution.
a. transparent to infrared radiation. d. the infrared imaging system’s minimum spot size.
b. a fairly good emitter.
c. almost a perfect reflector. 13. The spatial resolution of an instrument is related to the:
d. almost a perfect emitter.
a. thermal resolution.
b. spectral bandwidth.
8. If a surface has an emissivity of 0.35 and a reflectivity of
0.45, its transmissivity would be: c. system responsivity.
d. instantaneous field of view and the working distance.
a. impossible to determine without additional
information.
b. 0.80.
c. 0.10.
d. 0.20.
14. The noise equivalent temperature difference (NETD) of a 19. When measuring the temperature of a nongray target:
thermal infrared imager tends to:
a. the viewing angle is not critical.
a. improve as the target temperature increases. b. always assume a uniform emissivity.
b. degrade as the target temperature increases. c. varying surface temperature differences can be
c. remain constant regardless of the target temperature. ignored.
d. improve with increasing working distance. d. errors may occur when using a variety of instruments.

15. The 3 to 5 µm spectral region is well suited for: 20. Thermal diffusivity is:

a. inspection using a microbolometer. a. high for metals and low for porous materials.
b. measuring targets at extremely long working b. the same for all metals.
distances. c. low for metals and high for porous materials.
c. measuring targets warmer than 200 °C (392 °F). d. the same for all porous materials.
d. operating at near ambient temperatures.
21. The term used to describe a material’s surface temperature
16. When measuring the temperature of glass while using a response to a given energy input is called:
mid-wave (3 to 5 µm) infrared imaging system, which of
the following steps is necessary? a. diffuse reflectivity.
b. thermal conductance.
a. Use a 3.2 µm low-pass filter.
c. thermal effusivity.
b. Use a 5 µm high-pass filter.
d. spectral transmittance.
c. No filter is necessary if using the same emissivity
setting used with long-wave imaging systems.
d. Use a 3.9 µm bandpass filter.

17. A line scanner is best used for applications:

a. requiring online real-time process monitoring and

control of a linear thermal process.
b. where the material is stationary.
c. where the process speed is no greater than 3 m/s.
d. where the maximum temperature of the material is
300 °C (572 °F).

18. Most infrared focal plane array imagers:

a. use more costly optics than scanning radiometers.

b. offer better spatial resolution than scanning
radiometers.
c. offer better thermal resolution than scanning
radiometers.
d. offer less diagnostics features than scanning
radiometers.

75
 |
SECTION II NDT METHODS

Ultrasonic Testing 2. When an ultrasonic beam passes through the interface of

two dissimilar materials at an angle, a new angle of sound
Topical Outline travel takes place in the second material due to:

2.9 Ultrasonic Testing (UT) a. refraction.

2.9.1 Fundamentals b. attenuation.
2.9.1.1 Wave propagation
2.9.1.1.1 Sound fields c. rarefaction.
2.9.1.1.2 Wave travel modes d. compression.
2.9.1.1.3 Refraction, reflection,
scattering, and attenuation 3. The gradual loss of energy as ultrasonic vibrations travel
2.9.1.2 Transducers and sound beam coupling through material is referred to as:
2.9.2 UT
2.9.2.1 Basic types of equipment a. reflection.
2.9.2.2 Reference standards
2.9.2.3 Test result interpretation; discontinuity b. refraction.
indications c. compression.
2.9.2.4 System factors d. attenuation.
2.9.2.5 Applications
2.9.2.5.1 Flaw detection and evaluation
4. Ultrasonic velocities are different for different materials.
2.9.2.5.2 Thickness measurement
2.9.2.5.3 Bond evaluation These differences are primarily caused by differences in
2.9.2.5.4 Process control the materials’:
2.9.2.5.5 Castings
2.9.2.5.6 Weldments a. frequency and wavelength.
b. thickness and travel time.
c. elasticity and density.
d. chemistry and permeability.
REFERENCES
ASNT, 2007, Nondestructive Testing Handbook, Vol. 7: Ultrasonic Testing, third 5. Ultrasonic energy for immersion testing is transmitted to
edition, American Society for Nondestructive Testing, Columbus, OH. the test object as a compressional wave because:
ASNT, 2015, Ultrasonic Testing Classroom Training Book (PTP Series),
American Society for Nondestructive Testing, Columbus, OH. a. compressional waves travel faster and will therefore
ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Level II Study Guide: Ultrasonic Testing Method, reduce the distance of the interface signal.
American Society for Nondestructive Testing, Columbus, OH.
b. liquids will only sustain compressional waves.
ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Level III Study Guide: Ultrasonic Method,
American Society for Nondestructive Testing, Columbus, OH. c. compressional waves are used with immersion
ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Questions & Answers Book: Ultrasonic Testing testing only.
Method, American Society for Nondestructive Testing, Columbus, OH.
d. the higher intensity of compressional waves is
necessary to overcome high attenuation in liquids.
UT Review Questions
6. When inspecting coarse-grained materials, which of the
1. Ultrasonic waves propagate through test materials in the following frequencies will generate a sound wave that will
form of: be most easily scattered by the grain structure?

a. electromagnetic waves. a. 1.0 MHz

b. low-voltage electric fields. b. 2.25 MHz
c. discontinuous radio waves. c. 5 MHz
d. mechanical vibrations. d. 10 MHz
7. In general, shear waves are more sensitive to small 12. The primary purpose of reference blocks is to:
discontinuities than longitudinal waves for a given
frequency and in a given material because: a. aid the operator in obtaining maximum back
reflections.
a. the wavelength of shear waves is shorter than the b. obtain the greatest sensitivity possible from an
wavelength of longitudinal waves. instrument.
b. shear waves are not as easily dispersed in the c. provide a known reflecting area in calibrating an
material. instrument.
c. the direction of particle vibration for shear waves is d. establish the size and orientation of a discontinuity.
more sensitive to discontinuities.
d. the wavelength of shear waves is longer than the 13. The general use of distance-amplitude correction is to
wavelength of longitudinal waves. compensate for:

8. The ability of transducers to detect echoes from small a. attenuation, distance, and beam spread.
discontinuities is a definition of: b. amplitude of noise signals.
c. velocity changes.
a. resolution.
d. vertical nonlinearity in the ultrasonic instrument.
b. sensitivity.
c. definition. 14. In area-amplitude ultrasonic standard test blocks, the flat-
d. gain. bottom holes in the blocks are:

9. Which of the following will create a resonance condition a. all the same diameter.
in a specimen? b. different in diameter, increasing in size of 1/64 in.
(0.0156 in.) increments from the No. 1 block to the
a. Continuous longitudinal waves. No. 8 block.
b. Pulsed longitudinal waves. c. largest in the No. 1 block and smallest in the No. 8
c. Pulsed shear waves. block.
d. Continuous shear waves. d. drilled to different depths from the front surface of
the test block.
10. The display on most basic pulse-echo ultrasonic
instruments consists of: 15. Which of the following factors has the least influence on
the amount of energy reflected from a discontinuity?
a. automatic read-out equipment.
b. an A-scan presentation. a. Size of the discontinuity.
c. a B-scan presentation. b. Orientation of the discontinuity.
d. a C-scan presentation. c. Discontinuity type.
d. Test frequency.
11. In a basic pulse-echo ultrasonic instrument, the
component that produces the voltage that activates the 16. The ability to locate discontinuities that are close together
search unit is called: within the material is called:

a. an amplifier. a. resolution.
b. a receiver. b. sensitivity.
c. a pulser. c. effectiveness.
d. a synchronizer. d. phase delay.

77
 |
SECTION II NDT METHODS

17. Lack of parallelism between the entry surface and the 22. In immersion testing, the water distance between the
back surface: search unit and the test piece:

a. may result in a screen pattern that does not contain a. should be as small as possible.
back reflection indications. b. will have no effect on the test.
b. makes it difficult to locate discontinuities that lie c. should be the same as the water distance used during
parallel to the entry surface. calibration.
c. usually indicates a porous condition existing in the d. should be as great as possible.
metal.
d. will decrease the penetrating power of the test. 23. Generally, the best UT technique for detecting
discontinuities oriented along the fusion zone in a welded
18. Significant errors in ultrasonic thickness measurement plate is:
can occur if:
a. an angle-beam contact method employing surface
a. test velocity is kept constant. waves.
b. the velocity of propagation deviates substantially b. an immersion test using surface waves.
from an assumed constant value for a given material. c. a resonance technique.
c. water is used as a couplant between the transducer d. an angle-beam method using shear waves.
and the part being measured.
d. longitudinal waves are used. 24. Thin sheet may be inspected for laminar discontinuities
with the ultrasonic wave directed normal (perpendicular)
19. In contact testing, shear waves can be induced in the test to the surface by observing:
material by:
a. the amplitude of the front surface reflection.
a. placing an X-cut quartz crystal directly on the surface b. the multiple reflection pattern.
of the material and coupling through a film of oil.
c. the amplitude of the initial pulse.
b. using two transducers on opposite sides of the test
d. signals that “walk” or move along the time base as the
specimen.
transducer is scanned over the sheet.
c. using an angle-beam transducer with the transducer
mounted on a plastic wedge so that sound enters the 25. Ultrasonic inspection of castings is occasionally
part at an angle. impractical because of:
d placing a spherical acoustic lens on the face of the
transducer. a. extremely small grain structure typical in castings.
b. coarse grain structure.
20. The most commonly used method of producing shear c. uniform flow lines.
waves in a test part when inspecting by the immersion
d. random orientation of discontinuities.
method is by:

a. transmitting longitudinal waves into a part in a 26. Angle-beam testing of plate will often miss:
direction perpendicular to its front surface.
a. cracks that are perpendicular to the sound wave.
b. using two crystals vibrating at different frequencies.
b. inclusions that are randomly oriented.
c. using a low-frequency transducer.
c. laminations that are parallel to the front surface.
d. angulating the transducer to the proper angle with
d. a series of small discontinuities.
respect to the entry surface of the test part.

27. In addition to a weld area being inspected by the angle-

21. In immersion testing, proof that the search unit is normal
beam technique, which additional test is typically
(perpendicular) to a flat entry surface is indicated by:
performed to detect laminations in the base metal?
a. maximum reflection amplitude from the entry
a. Through-transmission testing.
surface.
b. Guided wave testing.
b. elimination of water multiples.
c. Straight-beam testing.
c. maximum reflection amplitude from the back
surface. d. Surface-wave testing.
d. maximum amplitude of the initial pulse.
28. An ultrasonic test using a straight-beam contact search Visual Testing
unit is being conducted through the thickness of a flat
part, such as plate. This test should detect:
Topical Outline
a. laminar-type discontinuities with major dimensions
parallel to the plane of the rolled surface. 2.10 Visual Testing (VT)
b. transverse-type discontinuities with major 2.10.1 Fundamentals
2.10.1.1 Principles and theory of VT
dimensions at right angles to the plane of the rolled
2.10.1.2 Selection of correct visual technique
surface.
2.10.1.3 Equipment and materials
c. radial discontinuities with major dimensions along 2.10.2 Specific applications
the length but radially oriented to the rolled surface. 2.10.2.1 Metal joining processes
d. rounded discontinuities at the edges of the rolled 2.10.2.2 Pressure vessels
plate. 2.10.2.3 Pumps
2.10.2.4 Valves
2.10.2.5 Bolting
29. UT techniques are useful in testing laminate and 2.10.2.6 Castings
sandwich construction test objects for: 2.10.2.7 Forgings
2.10.2.8 Extrusions
a. paint thickness. 2.10.2.9 Microcircuits
b. bond integrity. 2.10.3 Interpretation and evaluation
c. leakage. 2.10.3.1 Codes and standards
2.10.3.2 Environmental factors
d. surface roughness.

30. UT techniques are frequently used in online automatic

process control applications to measure and control:
REFERENCES
a. moisture content in materials. ASNT, 2010, Nondestructive Testing Handbook, Vol. 9: Visual Testing, third
edition, American Society for Nondestructive Testing, Columbus, OH.
b. surface roughness of turbine blade castings.
ASNT, 1993, Nondestructive Testing Handbook, Vol. 8: Visual and Optical
c. the thickness of cold-rolled strips, sheets, and plates. Testing, second edition, American Society for Nondestructive Testing,
Columbus, OH.
d. chemical activity in chemical etching processes.
ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Level II Study Guide: Visual Testing Method,
American Society for Nondestructive Testing, Columbus, OH.
31. Which of the following statements about field inspection
ASNT, latest edition, ASNT Level III Study Guide: Visual and Optical Testing
applications of UT is true? Method, American Society for Nondestructive Testing, Columbus, OH.
ASNT, 2017, Visual Testing Classroom Training Book (PTP Series), American
a. Manual and automatic systems can be used for field Society for Nondestructive Testing, Columbus, OH.
inspections.
b. Because the equipment is large and bulky, field
Visual Testing Review Questions
inspections are difficult, at best.
c. Aircraft and other field maintenance inspections
1. VT could be best described as:
usually require three persons: one to manipulate the
transducer, one to monitor the instrument, and one a. detection of near surface anomalies and various color
to record results. variations.
d. Digital displays must be used for outdoor inspection b. optical detection of surface anomalies and checking
because of the limited brightness of screen displays. conformance to specification.
c. evaluation of metallurgical conditions via electronic
32. Which of the following waves is able to follow a surface
microscope.
around a curve?
d. examination for a wide variety of discontinuities open
a. Longitudinal wave. to or just below the surface.
b. Shear wave.
c. Surface wave.
d. Lamb wave.

79
 |
SECTION II NDT METHODS

2. What element of the eye is analogous to a digital camera, 8. What is a commonly evident surface discontinuity visible
converting a light pattern into electronic signals? to the unaided eye following forming?

a. Eye muscle. a. Forging bursts at the center of the billet.

b. Iris. b. Laminations at end preparations of plate for welding.
c. Lens. c. Edge breaks in temper-rolled sheets of steel.
d. Retina. d. Segregation between pours.

3. Illumination varies inversely as the square of the distance 9. What type of cracking occurs at the termination point of a
between the source and the point on the surface weld made by tungsten inert gas welding?
increases. What is this law called?
a. Crater crack.
a. Inverse square law. b. Hot tearing.
b. Cosine law. c. Cold cracking.
c. Generation of light law. d. Hot cracking.
d. Lambert’s law.
10. What is pillowing corrosion on aircraft lap joints, typically
4. When measuring surface roughness, Ra is defined as on aircraft skins, usually attributed to?
what?
a. Misalignment corrosion of fasteners used to attach
a. Average distance between the highest and lowest the skins to the airframe.
points. b. Stretching of the skins beyond their yield points over
b. Average waviness from crest to trough. time.
c. Average distance of the profile to the mean line. c. Expansion of corrosion products under the skins.
d. Parameter of friction between contact surfaces. d. Twisting of the airframe during tight turns and similar
maneuvers.
5. What is the minimum luminance recommended by the
Illuminating Engineering Society (IES) for task lighting 11. When inspecting welds for discontinuities located by VT,
with medium contrast and small size detection desired? which of the following discontinuities is usually judged
the least detrimental, depending on its depth?
a. 100 lx
b. 200 lx a. Undercut.
c. 500 lx b. Cracks.
d. 2000 lx c. Lack of fusion.
d. Incomplete penetration.
6. What is the direction of view called in a borescope or
videoscope when viewing 45° off the straight-ahead 12. How can the heat-affected zone (HAZ) of carbon steel
direction of the probe? welds be made visible?

a. Forward slant. a. Etchants to enhance the visibility of the

b. Forward oblique. microstructure.
c. Forespective. b. High-frequency ultrasonic microscopic means.
d. Angulated. c. Color-contrast penetrating liquids.
d. Arrays of temperature-sensitive markings.
7. How many bundles are there in a fiber-optic borescope
and what are they called? 13. Reflectance is a measure of:

a. One; monochromatic bundle. a. the reactance of a coating.

b. Two; light guide and image guide. b. the mirror-like reflectance of a surface.
c. Two; light guide and CCD cable bundle. c. the amount of artificial light at the inspection surface.
d. Three; light guide, image guide, and fiber sheath. d. the flatness of a finish coating.
14. A datum: 16. A concave mirror can be helpful by:

a. is a theoretical point identified on the blueprint. a. focusing the image viewed.

b. is a theoretical point, axis, or plane, derived from b. diverging and optically reversing small images.
actual part features. c. converging and optically reversed small images.
c. is a feature controlled by two separate datums. d. increasing the light returned to the inspector.
d. has form only in terms of itself.

15. Color order systems describe color by:

a. value and brightness saturation.

b. primary and secondary colors.
c. value, hue, and saturation.
d. value of the primary color constituents.

81
 |
SECTION II NDT METHODS

ANSWERS TO REVIEW QUESTIONS

Acoustic Emission Testing

1b 2d 3d 4c 5a 6c 7a 8b 9d 10a

Electromagnetic Testing

1c 2a 3b 4c 5a 6c 7d 8c 9c 10d 11a 12b 13c 14b

15a 16c 17b 18a 19b 20b 21a 22a 23b 24d 25c 26a 27c

Leak Testing

1d 2b 3d 4c 5b 6c 7a 8c 9d 10a 11c 12d 13b 14c

15b

Liquid Penetrant Testing

1b 2d 3a 4d 5d 6b 7b 8a 9d 10a 11c 12b 13c 14c

15b 16b 17a 18a 19c 20d 21c 22b 23c 24d 25b 26c 27b 28a
29b

Magnetic Flux Leakage

1a 2d 3c 4c 5a 6b 7c 8d 9a 10c 11a 12d 13c 14b

15b 16c 17b 18c

Magnetic Particle Testing

1a 2c 3b 4c 5a 6b 7d 8b 9a 10c 11a 12d 13c 14d

15b 16c 17d 18c 19a 20b 21a 22d 23d 24a 25b 26c 27d

Neutron Radiography

1c 2a 3a 4d 5b 6a 7b 8d 9c 10a 11d 12c 13d 14b

15c 16c 17b 18a 19a 20b 21a 22b 23a 24b 25c 26d 27b 28c

Radiographic Testing

1a 2d 3b 4b 5d 6c 7a 8d 9c 10d 11c 12a 13c 14b

15d 16d 17c 18b 19a 20c 21a 22b 23c 24d 25b 26a 27c

Thermal/Infrared

1b 2d 3c 4b 5d 6a 7c 8d 9b 10a 11b 12c 13d 14a

15c 16d 17a 18b 19d 20a 21c

Ultrasonic Testing

1d 2a 3d 4c 5b 6d 7a 8b 9a 10b 11c 12c 13a 14b

15d 16a 17a 18b 19c 20d 21a 22c 23d 24b 25b 26c 27c 28a
29b 30c 31a 32d

Visual Testing

1b 2d 3a 4c 5c 6b 7b 8c 9a 10c 11a 12a 13b 14b

15c 16b
 | SECTION III

CHAPTER 5

MATERIALS AND PROCESSES

Overview As a suggestion in the use of this section of the study guide,

Commensurate with the need for NDT Level III personnel try to answer the questions about a particular chapter before pro-
to have basic knowledge of materials and processes, books have ceeding to the next chapter. If the subject matter is unfamiliar, or
been written specifically for the purpose of presenting the fun- if the questions are difficult to answer, read the chapter, especially
damentals of these subjects from an NDT perspective. Clearly, the section(s) referenced by the question. The material in the
not all NDT Level III personnel need to specialize in depth in book is presented specifically with the NDT technologist in mind.
more than a few facets of industrial materials and manufactur- It is concise and well-illustrated, and it does not require an engi-
ing processes. However, the relationships between NDT technol- neering or scientific background to be comprehended. Complex
ogy and materials and processing are pervasive. NDT personnel theories and unimportant details are not included.
charged with the responsibilities of selecting appropriate NDT The Basic Examination Level III Topical Outline for 3.0 Basic
methods, developing techniques and procedures, and direct- Materials, Fabrication, and Product Technology in ANSI/ASNT
ing the efforts of others in providing meaningful and reliable CP-105: ASNT Standard Topical Outlines for Qualification of
NDT must have a fundamental and broad knowledge of the Nondestructive Testing Personnel (2020) is presented below for
origins, nature, behavior, and application of materials and the your reference:
processes by which they are shaped into the products of today’s
commerce. 3.0 Basic Materials, Fabrication, and Product Technology
The importance of the relationships between NDT and 3.1 Fundamentals of material technology
materials and processing technology is characterized in the 3.1.1 Properties of materials
ASNT Level III Basic examination. Approximately one-third of 3.1.1.1 Strength and elastic properties
the Basic examination covers fundamentals of basic materials, 3.1.1.2 Physical properties
3.1.1.3 Material properties testing
fabrication, and product technology. Listed on the following
3.1.2 Origin of discontinuities and failure
pages are sample questions typical of those that have impor-
modes
tance to NDT personnel. Note that most have an underlying 3.1.2.1 Inherent discontinuities
basis that ties their content to decision points in NDT. 3.1.2.2 Process-induced discontinuities
Some NDT Level III personnel are not placed by their 3.1.2.3 Service-induced discontinuities
employers in work assignments that require significant knowl- 3.1.2.4 Failures in metallic materials
edge of materials and processing technology. However, pro- 3.1.2.5 Failures in nonmetallic materials
gression in NDT technology from Level II to Level III in most 3.1.3 Statistical nature of detecting and
industrial and commercial situations does require the indi- characterizing discontinuities
vidual to respond to more complex technical questions, not 3.2 Fundamentals of fabrication and product
only about the details of NDT but also about issues related to technology
3.2.1 Raw materials processing
causes and effects. Imagine being called upon to select NDT
3.2.2 Metals processing
methods, develop techniques and procedures, and instruct
3.2.2.1 Primary metals
others in carrying out an inspection of a critical component 3.2.2.1.1 Metal ingot
without knowing whether the component was a casting, forging, production
or weldment. Even with the knowledge of the component’s 3.2.2.1.2 Wrought primary
processing history, if the Level III lacks the knowledge of what metals
could go wrong during that processing, how can the Level III be 3.2.2.2 Castings
expected to render important decisions about what NDT should 3.2.2.2.1 Green sand molded
be used and how NDT method or technique should be used? 3.2.2.2.2 Metal molded
So fundamental is this relationship that the book Materials 3.2.2.2.3 Investment molded
and Processes for NDT Technology was prepared and published 3.2.2.3 Welding
3.2.2.3.1 Common processes
in 1981 and revised in 2016. The questions here follow the
3.2.2.3.2 Hard-surfacing
chapters in this second, updated edition of the book.
3.2.2.3.3 Solid-state

83
 |
SECTION III MATERIALS, FABRICATION, AND PRODUCT TECHNOLOGY

3.2.2.4 Brazing 3.2.3 Nonmetals and composite materials

3.2.2.5 Soldering processing
3.2.2.6 Machining and material 3.2.3.1 Basic materials processing and
removal process control
3.2.2.6.1 Turning, boring, and 3.2.3.2 Nonmetals and composites
drilling fabrication
3.2.2.6.2 Milling 3.2.3.3 Adhesive joining
3.2.2.6.3 Grinding 3.2.4 Dimensional metrology
3.2.2.6.4 Electrochemical 3.2.4.1 Fundamental units and
3.2.2.6.5 Chemical standards
3.2.2.7 Forming 3.2.4.2 Gauging
3.2.2.7.1 Cold-working 3.2.4.3 Interferometry
processes
3.2.2.7.2 Hot-working The questions that follow are referenced in Materials and
processes Processes for NDT Technology, second edition, published in 2016.
3.2.2.8 Powdered metal processes References are keyed in brackets. The first number refers to the
3.2.2.9 Heat treatment chapter and subsequent numbers to sections and subsections
3.2.2.10 Surface finishing and corrosion
within the chapter. Some chapters are more heavily weighted
protection
than others to better reflect the kinds of questions appearing
3.2.2.10.1 Shot peening and
on a Basic Level III examination. Although very few questions
grit blasting
3.2.2.10.2 Painting derive from Chapter 12 in this unit, this chapter in particular
3.2.2.10.3 Plating provides a good overview of various NDT methods that would
3.2.2.10.4 Chemical conversion enhance the study of Section II of this study guide.
coatings
3.2.2.11 Adhesive joining
REVIEW QUESTIONS

Chapter 1: Manufacturing and Materials Chapter 2: Classification, Structure, and Solidification of

Materials
1. Most solid metals and plastics that have reasonable
strength at room temperature are called: 1. In general, metals exist as:

a. composite materials. a. amorphous solids.

b. manufacturing materials. b. mixtures and compounds of iron and carbon.
c. allotropic materials. c. crystalline solids.
d. engineering materials. d. face-centered cubic lattices.
[1.1] [2.4]

2. “Manufacturing” refers to processing that starts with raw 2. The terms “body-centered cubic,” “face-centered cubic,”
material in a bulk form and is concerned mainly with and “hexagonal close-packed” all refer to the:
processing the raw material in a manner that changes its:
a. different sized grains that can exist at the same time
a. shape. in a metallic structure.
b. chemical form. b. sequence of crystalline growth in a typical mild steel.
c. mechanical properties. c. lattice structures that make up unit cells in a solid
d. physical properties. metallic structure.
[1.5] d. change in a metallic structure as it undergoes plastic
deformation.
[2.4]
3. Frequently, dimensions are permitted to vary within
specified limits. These variations are called:
3. Which of the following materials is not typically be used in
a. variances. the as-cast state?
b. fudge factors.
a. Aluminum.
c. tolerances.
b. Pure iron.
d. factors of safety.
c. Zinc.
[1.6.2]
d. Magnesium.
[2.5.4]
4. Design engineers are responsible for establishing the
function, appearance, quality, and cost of a product.
Regarding the role of nondestructive testing (NDT) in 4. Processes called “austenitizing,” “annealing,” and
product design, which of the following is true? “normalizing” are:

a. As a group, designers (by their training and a. approximate equilibrium heat-treatment processes.
education) are adequately informed about NDT to b. performed only on nonferrous metals.
establish NDT procedures and acceptance criteria.
c. cold-working processes.
b. When NDT appears necessary in a design, the
d. age-hardening processes.
designer should properly select the methods
[2.6.3]
and techniques to be used by reference to NDT
handbooks.
c. Designers should depend solely upon NDT personnel
to establish acceptance criteria.
d. Designers should seek input from NDT personnel to
ensure all required inspections can be performed.
[1.6.3]

85
 |
SECTION III MATERIALS, FABRICATION, AND PRODUCT TECHNOLOGY

5. Annealing is usually performed to: 10. Which of the following groups prevent corrosion?

a. increase hardness. a. Anodizing, plating, and painting.

b. increase strength. b. Insulating, jacketing, and strapping.
c. remove strain hardening. c. Annealing, normalizing, and hardening.
d. increase impact toughness. d. Ductility, enlarged grains, and increase hardness.
[2.6.3] [2.7.4]

6. The term precipitation hardening is often used 11. The process of returning ductility to a cold-worked low-
interchangeably with the term: carbon steel is called:

a. age hardening. a. precipitation.

b. recrystallization. b. recrystallization.
c. annealing. c. allotropic change.
d. work hardening. d. austenitization.
[2.6.4] [2.8.6]

7. In a tensile test on a cylindrical specimen, the strain 12. The primary goal of alloying for engineering materials is:
measured on the specimen gauge length is used to
calculate: a. to introduce substitutional or interstitial impurities.
b. to increase the cost of manufacturing.
a. age hardening.
c. to create point or line defects in the crystal lattice.
b. hardness.
d. to increase the strength of the nucleus.
c. the modulus of elasticity.
[2.8.7]
d. instability.
[2.6.5]
Chapter 3: Properties of Materials
8. Which of the following material properties are of most
concern if corrosion resistance is essential? 1. A common industrial example of atomic diffusion is:

a. Processing properties. a. carburization of low-carbon steel.

b. Mechanical properties. b. electron beam melting of a nickel-based super alloy.
c. Physical properties. c. structural adhesive used in a demanding application.
d. Electrochemical properties. d. plasma cleaning operation prior to wire-bonding.
[2.7.2] [3.1]

9. Attacks on metals by direct chemical action and/or 2. Which of the following statements is true regarding the
electrolysis are called: electrical conductivity of aluminum alloys?

a. corrosion. a. Most aluminum alloys are in the range of 70% to 96%

b. erosion. IACS.

c. austenitic transformations. b. Clad aluminum takes on the conductivity of the base

metal.
d. galvanization.
c. Each basic wrought aluminum alloy has a
[2.7.3]
conductivity distinct from any other.
d. The conductivity of an aluminum alloy is lower than
that of pure aluminum.
[3.2.3]
3. Which of the following requires permanent deformation? Stress

a. Load below the yield strength point. E

b. Low-frequency dynamic loading. C F

c. Strain hardening. B D

d. Elongation within the elastic range.

Rise
[3.3]
Run

900
C A
Strain
800
700
D Figure 2
Stress (MPa)

600
500
B E
400
6. In Figure 2, which of the following ranges indicates the
300
A effect of work hardening (to its maximum) caused by
200
100
plastic flow of the material during a tensile load?
0
0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 a. A–B
Strain (mm) b. B–C
Figure 1 c. C–D
d. D–E
[3.3.3]

4. In Figure 1, point B is called the:

7. In Figure 2, the points represented by E and F would be
a. linear-elastic region. closer together if the material being tested were:
b. yield strength point. a. less ductile.
c. ultimate tensile strength. b. loaded in tension.
d. modulus of elasticity. c. loaded in lapshear.
[3.3.1] d. more ductile.
[3.3.3]
5. Tensile tests are conducted on specimens from a newly
developed alloy in order to determine the ultimate tensile
8. The modulus of elasticity, or Young’s modulus, is the
strength of the material. Such tests are referred to as:
quotient of strength divided by strain up to the:
a. indirect tests.
a. yield strength.
b. physical properties tests.
b. tensile strength.
c. destructive tests.
c. compressive strength.
d. acoustic emission tests.
d. resistance to stress.
[3.3.2]
[3.3.3]

9. Direct hardness tests provide a measure of a material’s

ability to resist:

a. bending.
b. permanent deformation or penetration.
c. tensile stresses.
d. elongation.
[3.3.5]

87
 |
SECTION III MATERIALS, FABRICATION, AND PRODUCT TECHNOLOGY

Chapter 4: Production and Properties of Common Metals

Fracture
1. The reduction of iron ore, by mixing with coke,
Tertiary limestone, and oxygen for combustion of the coke,
% Elongation

is accomplished in:
Secondary or steady-state
a. a blast furnace.
Primary
b. an open-hearth furnace.
c. a bessemer converter.
d. a basic oxygen furnace.
Time [4.1.2]

Figure 3
2. In the iron- and steelmaking process, “pig iron” refers to:

a. the waste material that contains high concentrations

10. What does Figure 3 indicate? of impurities and slag and is either discarded or used
as a byproduct.
a. Endurance limit.
b. a high-carbon, low-ductility metal produced in the
b. Toughness related to strength. blast furnace that can be used to make subsequent
c. Number of fatigue cycles. types of iron and steel.
d. Creep rate at a specific temperature and load. c. the molten metal from the blast furnace that is not
[3.3.8] usable and is poured off into a series of crude castings
called “pigs.”
d. low-cost metal used in large production factories.
[4.1.2]

60 3. An undesirable byproduct of the steelmaking process is:

Maximum Stress, kPa

a. coke.
50
b. low-carbon steel.
40 c. low-alloy steel.
d. slag.
30 [4.1.2]

20
4. Which of the following techniques is often used to speed
10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7 10 8 10 9 10 10
Cycles up the steelmaking process?
Figure 4 a. Adding large amounts of carbon to the molten metal.
b. Reducing the amount of scrap steel that is often
added to the molten metal.
c. Adding oxygen to the molten metal.
11. Figure 4 typifies:
d. Converting the old open-hearth furnaces into electric
a. an S-N plot. furnaces.
b. a creep test curve. [4.1.3]
c. a stress-strain diagram.
d. a true stress-strain diagram.
5. Typically, the highest quality of steel is produced in: 10. Which of the following is true relative to the comparison of
the properties of aluminum-based alloys and iron-based
a. an electric furnace. alloys?
b. an open-hearth furnace.
a. Iron has a lower melting point than aluminum.
c. a bessemer furnace.
b. Iron can exist in several different crystalline
d. a basic oxygen furnace.
structures, and its properties can be controlled by
[4.1.3]
heat treatment.
c. Iron can be alloyed to increase its strength, whereas
6. By which of the following processes is most of the world’s aluminum is strongest in its pure state.
steel produced? d. Iron is preferred in load-carrying designs, but it
should not be used for any deformation type of
a. Bessemer converter.
manufacturing process.
b. Electric furnace.
[4.1.8]
c. Open hearth.
d. Basic oxygen furnace.
11. Corrosion-resistant steels having relatively high
[4.1.3]
percentages of nickel and chromium are called:

7. What percentage of carbon is found in steel? a. wrought iron.

b. low-alloy steels.
a. Between 3 and 4%. c. stainless steels.
b. Between 2 and 3%. d. nonferrous steels.
c. Less than 0.2%. [4.1.8]
d. Less than 2%.
[4.1.6]
12. Austenitic stainless steels are paramagnetic; this means
that:
8. A steel with 40 points of carbon contains:
a. alternating current must be used when using the
a. 40% carbon. magnetic particle testing method.
b. 4% carbon. b. the steel is very dense and, relative to other steels,
c. 0.4% carbon. difficult to penetrate with X-rays.

d. 0.04% carbon. c. ultrasonic testing is the logical NDT method to

choose because of the coarse-grained nature of
[4.1.6]
paramagnetic material.
d. the material has a very low magnetic permeability.
9. Low-carbon steel contains approximately: [4.1.8]

a. 0.6 to 2.5% carbon.

b. 0.06 to 0.25% carbon. 13. Which of the following is an advantage of cast steel over
c. 0.5 to 1.6% carbon. wrought steels?

d. 5 to 16% carbon. a. Cast steels usually have higher mechanical properties

[4.1.6] than wrought steels.
b. Cast steels have more isotropic properties than
wrought steels.
c. Cast steels are more corrosion-resistant than wrought
steels.
d. Cast steels cannot be heat treated and are thus less
expensive to produce than wrought steels.
[4.1.10]

89
 |
SECTION III MATERIALS, FABRICATION, AND PRODUCT TECHNOLOGY

14. Which of the following nonferrous metals is the most 19. Which of the following metals has a density approximately
important structural material? two-thirds that of aluminum?

a. Copper alloys. a. Magnesium.

b. Nickel alloys. b. Iron.
c. Zinc alloys. c. Copper.
d. Aluminum alloys. d. Nickel.
[4.2.1] [4.7.1]

15. Many metals exhibit an increase in strength caused by 20. A high-strength, low-density, corrosion-resistant metal
plastic flow beyond the elastic limit. This effect is called: alloy of significance in the aircraft, marine, and chemical
processing industries is:
a. twinning.
b. plastic deformation. a. tungsten.
c. work hardening. b. zinc.
d. age hardening. c. titanium.
[4.2.2] d. magnesium.
[4.8]

16. The heat treatment of aluminum for the purpose of

hardening and strengthening:
Chapter 5: Polymers, Ceramics, and Composites
a. is not possible with aluminum alloys because they
contain no carbon and cannot undergo allotropic 1. Which of the following statements is true concerning
changes. plastics following their initial polymerization?
b. can produce tensile strengths equivalent to some
carbon steels. a. Thermoplastics can be endlessly reshaped.
c. requires the use of special furnaces and is rarely done b. Thermosetting plastics do not soften, but char and
as a practical application. deteriorate when reheated.
d. requires that iron and carbon be alloyed for the best c. All plastics are synthetic and contain no natural
results. materials.
[4.2.4] d. Plastics have a complex molecular structure, making
it expensive to bind with other materials.
[5.1.1.2]
17. Brass and bronze are alloys of zinc, tin, and a large
percentage of:
2. Based on the strength-to-weight ratio:
a. beryllium.
b. copper. a. no plastic materials can compare with metals.
c. lead. b. plastics, as a group, are superior in strength to most
ferrous metals.
d. nickel.
c. some plastics, including nylon, may have strengths
[4.3.1]
greater than some steels.
d. plastics, being chemically inert, retain their strength
18. MonelTM and InconelTM are: longer than carbon steels in corrosive environments.

a. nickel alloys. [5.1.2]

b. steel alloys.
c. magnesium alloys.
d. aluminum alloys.
[4.4.3; Table 4.12]
3. Which of the following statements is true regarding 6. Which of the following statements is true concerning
plastics processing? composite materials?

a. Unlike metals, plastics must be processed without the a. Composite materials are engineered from one or
addition of heat. more reinforcing agents and a matrix to increase
b. All plastic molding processes use liquid-state strength and reduce weight.
materials introduced into the mold cavity. b. When composite materials are cured, the
c. Injection molding can be done only with constituents lose their original identity and form
thermosetting materials. chemical compounds with one another.
d. Both thermoplastics and thermosetting plastics may c. A unique feature of composite materials is that their
be processed by molding, casting, and extrusion. tensile strength frequently exceeds the strength of the
strongest constituent.
[5.1.3]
d. Composites are usually formed into complex
three-dimensional shapes with each dimension
4. Reinforced plastic molding involves the use of: approximately equal to the other two.

a. thermosetting plastics and fibrous reinforcement [5.3]

materials.
b. thermosetting plastics and metallic powder 7. Which of the following materials is typically considered
reinforcement. when the application requires high compressive strength?
c. thermoplastics and wood fiber reinforcement
a. Glass fibers.
materials.
b. Aramid fibers.
d. thermoplastics and metallic powder reinforcement.
c. Carbon fibers.
[5.1.3.5]
d. Ceramic fibers.
[5.3.3.2]
5. The major difference between materials classified as
“composites” and those classified as “mixtures” is that:
8. Which of the following statements is true concerning
a. composites contain metallic constituents and honeycomb?
mixtures are nonmetallic.
b. mixtures start as liquids blended together and a. The function of a honeycomb core is to lighten,
composites start as solids. stiffen, and strengthen by utilizing the “sandwich
principle.”
c. mixtures are elastomeric, whereas composites
are characterized as having at least one plastic b. In honeycomb, the walls of the cellular core material
component. are aligned parallel with the plane of the face sheets.
d. mixtures are a type of composite with random c. Honeycomb containing nonmetallic elements can be
orientation and shape of the constituents. bonded by adhesives, brazing, or diffusion welding.
[5.2.1] d. Honeycomb combining metallic and nonmetallic
elements cannot be used in cryogenic service due to
the permeability of the nonmetallic elements.
[5.3.5]

9. The mechanism of adhesion may combine mechanical

interlocking with:

a. stickiness of the adhesive.

b. roughness of the adherends.
c. dynamic mechanical forces.
d. cohesion.
[5.3.6.2]

91
 |
SECTION III MATERIALS, FABRICATION, AND PRODUCT TECHNOLOGY

10. Which of the following tests uses a pendulum to break a 4. Which of the following may cause a discontinuity even
specimen that is notched and supported on both ends, though its intended purpose is to prevent shrinkage
with the result of measuring energy absorption? cavities by absorbing heat from the molten metal in the
center of the casting?
a. Creep test.
b. Charpy test. a. Riser.
c. Fatigue test. b. Internal chill.
d. Transverse rupture test. c. Core.
[5.3.7.2] d. Chaplet.
[6.1.1.5]

Chapter 6: Casting 5. In a casting, shrinkage occurs:

1. The design of the casting is important because the quality a. only after the transformation from liquid to solid.
of the finished product can be adversely affected by: b. only during the transformation from liquid to solid.
c. before, during, and after the transformation from
a. liquid metal pour volume, gate locations, and liquid to solid.
nonuniform casting sections.
d. only when the metal is in the liquid state.
b. mold temperature, slow post casting cooling, and
[6.1.2.2]
magnetization.
c. riser baffles, pour cup angle, and mold parting lines.
d. alloy element segregation, change in metal phase, 6. Large voids or porosity in a casting result from:
and sprue spacing.
a. turbulent flow of the molten metal during pouring.
[6.1.1.1]
b. alloy element segregation.
c. molten metal boiling because of superheat.
2. The part of the casting where the gate or riser attaches: d. gas evolution before and during solidification.

a. is the area used to establish reference standards for [6.1.2.2]

cast materials.
b. provides the best quality material because of rapid 7. During the solidification of a casting, the shrinkage that
cooling in this area. occurs:
c. may provide a concentration point for discontinuities.
a. may cause cavities that are enlarged by the evolution
d. is designed to create nonuniform section thicknesses.
of gases.
[6.1.1.3]
b. may cause porosity and shrinkage cavities primarily
in the outer surfaces where the metal cools first.
3. Risers, feeders, or feed heads in castings serve to provide c. requires that the pattern used be slightly smaller than
sources of molten metal to compensate for: the desired dimension of the finished casting.
d. may be eliminated by investment casting.
a. misruns.
[6.1.2.2]
b. cold shuts.
c. dendritic grain growth.
d. shrinkage. 8. A casting process used to produce elongated shapes
by drawing solidified metal from a water-cooled mold
[6.1.1.4]
backed by molten metal is:

a. centrifugal casting.
b. continuous casting.
c. draw casting.
d. extrusion.
[6.2.1]
9. Green sand casting molds include: 14. Another term for precision casting and the lost-wax
process is:
a. sand, clay, and water.
b. sand, wax, and solvent. a. investment casting.
c. sand, refractory metals, and water. b. die casting.
d. sand, carbon, and green clay. c. metal mold casting.
[6.2.2.2] d. shell mold casting.
[6.2.4]

10. Which of the following NDT methods can be commonly

used to inspect castings for unfused chaplets and to 15. Permanent molds are most frequently made of:
determine that all the core materials have been removed?
a. ceramics.
a. Ultrasonic testing. b. fused sand and plastic.
b. Magnetic particle testing. c. metal.
c. Radiographic testing. d. plaster.
d. Electromagnetic testing. [6.2.6]
[6.2.2.6]

16. A casting process used to produce hollow products like

11. Mold material in the form of inserts that exclude metal large pipes and hollow shafts is:
flow and thus form internal surfaces or passages in a
casting are called: a. investment casting.
b. blow casting.
a. chills.
c. core casting.
b. chaplets.
d. centrifugal casting.
c. cores.
[6.2.7]
d. patterns.
[6.2.2.6]
17. Which of the following metals has low strength and high
corrosion resistance, and is used largely in die-casting
12. Small metal supports used to support and position cores operations?
become part of a casting by fusing with the molten metal.
Such devices are called: a. Zinc.
b. Aluminum.
a. core hangers.
c. Magnesium.
b. chills.
d. Manganese.
c. risers.
[6.2.8]
d. chaplets.
[6.2.2.6]
18. Which of the following is true regarding solidification of
molten metal in a casting mold?
13. Casting molds made by covering a heated metal pattern
with sand that is mixed with particles of thermosetting a. The metal cools at a constant rate, thus providing fine
plastic are called: equiaxed grains throughout.
b. Cooling takes place in phases having different rates
a. green sand molds. that produce different types of grain structure in
b. shell molds. different sections of the casting.
c. die casting molds. c. Solidification occurs at a constant rate, beginning at
d. permanent molds. the interior of the casting and progressing outward.
[6.2.2.10] d. Thick sections tend to cool more rapidly than thin
sections because thin sections consist mostly of fine
equiaxed grains.
[6.3.2]

93
 |
SECTION III MATERIALS, FABRICATION, AND PRODUCT TECHNOLOGY

19. The term used to describe a discontinuity in a casting 5. Which of the following product forms is generally selected
that occurs when molten metal interfaces with already for high strength and controlled property directionality?
solidified metal with failure to fuse at the interface is:
a. Castings.
a. hot tear. b. Forgings.
b. cold shut. c. Extrusions.
c. inclusion. d. Hot-rolled flat stock.
d. segregation. [7.2.1]
[6.4.3]

6. NDT is often used on products intended for secondary

operations to:
Chapter 7: Metal Forming
a. ensure that further operations are not performed
1. The advantages of deformation of metals as a on material that contains discontinuities that could
manufacturing process are: cause rejection of the manufactured part.
b. determine that discontinuities do not exist in the
a. consistent duplication, fast production, low cost for material that could damage the rolling mills and
high volumes. other equipment.
b. low tooling cost, less NDT, doesn’t require heat c. determine the ductility of the material after the
treatment. rolling operation is complete.
c. easier to recycle, better grain structure, doesn’t d. accurately determine the compressive strength of the
require special materials. material after it passes through the rolling mill.
d. more labor, only makes simple shapes, holds finishes [7.2.1.1]
well.
[7.2]
7. An NDT method best suited to locating discontinuities
caused by inclusions rolled into steel plate is:
2. Which of the following would have the least ductility?
a. radiographic testing.
a. Cold-rolled steel plate. b. ultrasonic testing.
b. Hot-rolled steel plate. c. visual testing.
c. Cast iron. d. magnetic particle testing.
d. Hot-rolled aluminum plate. [7.2.1.1]
[7.2]

8. Slabs, blooms, and billets are:

3. Forged products invariably exhibit:
a. the shapes that the ingot is rolled into prior to a
a. high susceptibility to corrosion. variety of secondary operations.
b. lower strength than their cast counterparts. b. the three consecutive stages that the metal goes
c. directional properties. through during the production of products such as
angle iron and channel iron.
d. poor weldability.
c. types of discontinuities that occur during the hot
[7.2.1]
rolling of steel.
d. the three different shapes produced during typical
4. The manufacturing process used most to form metals into cold-rolling operations.
three-dimensional shapes is:
[7.2.2.1]

a. casting.
b. machining.
c. welding.
d. forging.
[7.2.1]
9. Before cold-finishing operations can be done on hot- 13. Which of the following statements is true concerning
rolled materials, cleaning is often done by immersing the deformation processes?
hot-rolled material in acid baths in a process called:
a. Hot working usually follows cold working.
a. degreasing. b. Hot working must be followed by heat treatment.
b. descaling. c. Cold working usually follows hot working.
c. pickling. d. Cold working renders brittle material more ductile.
d. anodizing. [7.2.2.2]
[7.2.2.1]

14. Machinability and fatigue resistance are improved in most

10. During the steelmaking process, a large number metals that have been:
of discontinuities such as slag, porosity, and
shrinkage cavities exist in the top of the ingot. These a. hot worked.
discontinuities are: b. cold worked.
c. heat treated.
a. mostly eliminated in subsequent hot working due to
d. cast.
the pressure that “welds” the void shut.
[7.2.2.2]
b. located with NDT at later stages of production.
c. almost nonexistent with modern steelmaking
processes. 15. The manufacturing process performed principally on
d. removed by cropping up to one-third off the top of flat products and bars that improves hardness, strength,
the ingot. surface finish, and dimensional accuracy is:

[7.2.2.1] a. cold rolling.

b. hot rolling.
11. Discontinuities with their origin in the original ingot can c. forging.
be reduced in severity by the closing and welding of voids
d. sintering.
and the breaking up and elongation of inclusions by
[7.2.2.2]
which of the following processes?

a. Cold working. 16. Most seamless tubing made without welds is processed by:
b. Hot rolling.
c. Heat treatment. a. casting.
d. Welding. b. piercing.

[7.2.2.1] c. cold rolling.

d. brazing.
[7.2.2.2]
12. Cold-rolling sheet steel usually begins with a material that:

a. has been completely inspected with an automated 17. With flat products such as cold-rolled strip and sheet,
radiographic system. ultrasonic and radiation gauges may be used to provide
b. has been previously hot rolled to dimensions close to an accurate measurement of:
the size of the finished product.
c. has less ductility and greater hardness than typical a. strain rate.
hot-rolled steel. b. surface roughness.
d. will have a lower yield and tensile strength after cold c. thermal properties.
working. d. thickness.
[7.2.2.2] [7.2.2.2]

95
 |
SECTION III MATERIALS, FABRICATION, AND PRODUCT TECHNOLOGY

18. Most steel pipe is produced by forming and: 23. Deep drawing, blanking, punching, and shearing are
operations most commonly applied to:
a. drawing.
b. welding. a. castings.
c. forging. b. slabs or blooms.
d. pressing. c. extracted ore.
[7.2.2.3] d. sheet metal.
[7.3.2]

19. A process that requires the use of large, powerful

equipment that forms ductile material into a wide variety 24. Most new developments in sheet-metal forming typically
of long-length, uniform, cross-sectional shapes best use nonconventional energy sources. What is a common
describes: feature of these processes?

a. forging. a. The use of lasers for controlled heat input.

b. powder metallurgy. b. The use of cryogenics to super-cool the metal prior to
forming.
c. extrusion.
c. The use of energy sources that release large amounts
d. die casting.
of energy in a very short time.
[7.2.3]
d. The use of large autoclaves that contain both the
tooling and the metal being formed.
20. Among other factors, the advantageous effects of [7.3.4]
recrystallization depend upon the:
25. Chemical catalysts, filter elements, and bearings are
a. rate of heating.
commonly made by:
b. temperature at which deformation takes place.
c. presence of carbon in excess of 25% for steels. a. powder metallurgy.
d. presence of silicon in excess of 0.1% for steels. b. galvannealing.
[7.2.4] c. vacuum metallization.
d. hot isostatic pressing.
[7.4]
21. In drawing and deep drawing, the final shape often can be
completed in a series of draws, each successively deeper.
What process performed between draws might effectively 26. Powder metallurgy provides two unique advantages in
reduce the number of draws required? metals processing. One is the capability to produce shapes
and objects of refractory metals that are extremely difficult
a. Recrystallization. or impractical to melt; the other is to:
b. Pickling.
c. Etching. a. economically produce metals with extremely low
melting temperatures.
d. Hardening heat treatment.
b. produce metal shapes with controlled porosity.
[7.2.4]
c. produce metals that can be easily machined by
electrochemical processes.
22. Spinning can be used to form: d. produce metals that are corrosion resistant.
[7.4.1]
a. spherical deep-drawn shapes.
b. cemented carbide cutting tools.
27. A major purpose of pressing the metal powders during
c. rectangular sheet metal tanks.
powder metallurgy processing is to:
d. solid spheres.
[7.2.4] a. squeeze out excess moisture.
b. further refine the grains.
c. compact the powders into mechanical and atomic
closeness.
d. decrease the contact area.
[7.4.2]
28. Powder metallurgy sintering: 3. Melting of faying surfaces, proximity of surfaces, and
cleanliness are requirements for:
a. is performed above the material’s melting
temperature. a. soldering.
b. allows parts to be hot worked, heat treated, or b. adhesive bonding.
machined afterward. b. fastening.
c. results in a maximum of 70% theoretical density. d. fusion bonding.
d. leaves parts in a fragile state subject to handling [8.1.2.1]
damage.
[7.4.2]
4. Metallurgical effects in a weld, such as grain size variation
and shrinkage, are similar to those that occur in:
29. In the powder metallurgy process, sintering is:
a. forgings.
a. in most cases a fully solid-state process. b. castings.
b. never a fully solid-state process. c. extrusions.
c. principally done at room temperature. d. hot-rolled plates.
d. always done at elevated temperature and high [8.1.2.1]
pressure.
[7.4.3]
5. Pressure welding can be accomplished with pressure
alone, but what else is usually added?

Chapter 8: Joining and Fastening a. Heat.

b. Filler material.
1. An assembly that has been created by joining two or more c. Oxides.
parts by one or more welds is called a:
d. Adhesives.
a. joint. [8.1.2.2]
b. bonded structure.
c. weld. 6. In pressure bonding, heat has the effect of:
d. weldment.
a. increasing malleability.
[8.1]
b. age hardening.
c. reducing the grain size.
2. A general definition of welding describes the joining of
d. causing a phase change.
two surfaces:
[8.1.2.2]
a. with a filler metal that has a higher melting point than
the base metal. 7. Soldering, brazing, and braze welding all:
b. with a filler material that is different from the base
material. a. have the same strength characteristics.
c. in a permanent union established by atom-to-atom b. use a process where only the filler metal is actually
bonds. melted.
d. where both heat and pressure are necessary for c. are fusion-type weldments.
permanent bonding. d. use a process where both the base metal and filler
[8.1] metal are melted.
[8.1.2.3]

97
 |
SECTION III MATERIALS, FABRICATION, AND PRODUCT TECHNOLOGY

8. Melting of only the filler material, proximity of surfaces,

and cleanliness are requirements for:

a. fusion bonding.
b. brazing.
Figure 6
c. diffusion bonding.
d. friction stir welding.
[8.1.3.2] 11. What type of weld joint preparation is shown in Figure 6?

a. J-groove.
9. In the process of diffusion welding, often called diffusion
b. Double J-groove.
bonding, the base metal is joined by:
c. Vee-groove.
a. melting the weld joint area with strip heaters. d. Square groove.
b. using high-temperature adhesives. [8.2.1.1]
c. putting it under pressure at temperatures below the
melting point.
d. the heat of frictional movement between the surfaces
to be joined.
[8.1.4]

Arrow side A B
of joint

Arrow of
welding symbol
C D

Figure 7

Other side
of joint
12. In Figure 7, which weld symbol needs to be changed to
Figure 5 match the weld condition shown?

a. A
b. B

10. What type of weld joint is depicted in Figure 5? c. C

d. D
a. Corner joint. [8.2.1.1]
b. Butt joint.
c. Tee joint.
13. The uneven shrinkage and brittle structures that occur due
d. Edge joint. to the rapid cooling of a weld can often be reduced by:
[8.2.1.1]
a. preheating the weldment prior to welding.
b. using a filler metal with a higher carbon content than
the base metal.
c. clamping the weldment in a rigid fixture.
d. overdesigning the size of the weldment to prevent
shrinkage.
[8.2.2]
14. Welds and weldments have been known to develop cracks 18. In arc welding, the electric arc is usually sustained
long after cooling but prior to being used in service. What between an electrode and the:
is the principal cause for such cracks?
a. welding machine.
a. Accelerated corrosion at high temperature. b. workpiece.
b. Scattered porosity in the weld. c. coating on the electrode.
c. Improper selection of base material. d. shielding gas.
d. Excessive residual stresses. [8.2.5]
[8.2.2]

19. Which of the following gases are most frequently used as

15. The principal purpose of preheat treatment and post-heat shielding to provide an inert atmosphere in the vicinity of
treatment in welds is to: the weld?

a. reduce the probability of formation of porosity in the a. Argon, helium, and carbon dioxide.
weld. b. Neon, tritium, and helium.
b. neutralize residual stresses and geometric distortion. c. Sulphur dioxide, argon, and oxygen.
c. create grains in the weld that are the same as those in d. Argon, nitrogen, and hydrogen.
the base metal.
[8.2.5; 8.2.5.4]
d. cause the weld ripple and reinforcement to blend into
the base metal.
20. The burn-off rate and amount of spattering during the arc
[8.2.2]
welding process can often be controlled by:

16. In welding, the most obvious discontinuities are those a. proper post-heating of the entire weldment.
associated with structural anomalies in the weld itself. b. frequent changing of the tungsten electrode.
Which conditions are welding process discontinuities? c. maintaining the longest arc length possible to reduce
the heat in the weld zone.
a. Part fit-up, laminations, incorrect base metal.
d. selecting the proper electrode polarity.
b. Weld dimension, location, distortion.
[8.2.5.1]
c. Correct filler metal, corrosion, sequence.
d. Insulation, paint, metallic coatings.
21. Due to high temperatures and rapid rate of cooling, the
[8.2.2]
filler material used in fusion welds:

17. Thermal conductivity of a metal is an important factor to a. is coated with an oxide to help reduce weld
consider in making quality weldments because: discontinuities.
b. contains alloys that will help compensate for
a. some metals, such as aluminum, have a low properties lost during the welding process.
conductivity, which results in weld discontinuities
c. is alloyed with nickel, copper, and carbon to eliminate
due to localized heat buildup.
cracking.
b. some metals, such as stainless steel, have a high
d. should be as close as possible to the same alloy
conductivity, which results in lack of fusion
content as the base material.
discontinuities as the heat is quickly removed from
[8.2.6]
the weld zone.
c. in some metals, such as aluminum, very high
temperature gradients are produced, causing stresses
during cooling.
d. some metals, such as stainless steel, have low
conductivity, which results in weld discontinuities
caused by localized overheating.
[8.2.2]

99
 |
SECTION III MATERIALS, FABRICATION, AND PRODUCT TECHNOLOGY

22. When molten metal is transferred from the electrode 26. The welding process capable of very high intensity and
to the weld zone, which of the following can be used to rate of heat transfer is:
shield the molten metal from the atmosphere?
a. braze welding.
a. Base metal, filler metal, supplemental powder. b. diffusion welding.
b. Tungsten, solid wire, spray powder. c. soldering.
c. Electrode coating, shielding gas, granular flux. d. plasma arc welding.
d. Controlled heat input, clean surfaces, qualified weld [8.2.9]
procedure.
[8.2.6]
27. The welding process in which the arc is extinguished after
melting a slag cover and in which the base metal and
23. Which of the following welding processes uses a copper slides form a sort of moving mold is called:
nonconsumable electrode with the arc maintained in an
atmosphere of inert gas? a. submerged arc welding.
b. electroslag welding.
a. Gas tungsten arc welding.
c. electron beam welding.
b. Submerged arc welding.
d. slag mold welding.
c. Gas metal arc welding.
[8.2.14]
d. Electroslag welding.
[8.2.6]

24. Shielding in the submerged arc welding process is

provided by: Water

a. gases. Electrode
b. a flux-coated welding rod.
c. granular flux that completely surrounds the arc.
d. chopped glass fibers. Weld nugget
[8.2.6]

Transformer
25. A welding process that is most frequently carried out in a
vacuum chamber is:

a. plasma arc welding. Figure 8

b. electron beam welding.
c. electroslag welding.
d. friction welding.
28. Which welding process is depicted in Figure 8?
[8.2.7]
a. Electron beam welding.
b. Plasma arc welding.
c. Resistance spot welding.
d. Friction welding.
[8.2.15]
 32. Undercut on a weld pass is usually caused by:

a. poor operator technique.

b. a rate of travel that is too slow, which causes the base
A B metal to become too hot.
c. the use of an electrode that is too large for the current
capacity of the welding machine.
d. welding in the vertical position.
[8.3.3]

Figure 9 33. Crater cracks may take the form of a single crack or star-
shaped cracks and will usually be found:

a. by magnetic particle techniques since crater cracks

29. If the vee-groove weld shown in Figure 9 was made in
are always subsurface.
multiple passes and not clamped or restrained, typical
warping would take place in which direction? b. anywhere along a weld where the welding was
stopped and restarted.
a. Edges A and B would be raised due to the contraction c. in the natural crater formed between the two plates in
of the weld metal. a typical fillet weld.
b. Edges A and B would be lowered due to the d. in the root area of a multiple-pass weld where the
expansion of the weld metal in the weld zone. weld metal failed to flow completely into the root
c. In a multipass weld, there would be little if any opening.
warpage. [8.3.3]
d. Expansion and contraction would be equal in a vee-
groove weld as shown.
34. Weldments subject to restraint during welding can
[8.3.2] develop high residual stresses. Unrestrained weldments
can develop:
30. Cracks in the weld metal are primarily of which three
a. geometric distortion.
types?
b. high residual stresses.
a. Shallow, deep, and intermittent. c. cracking after the weld has cooled.
b. Longitudinal, transverse, and crater. d. fatigue cracking.
c. Laminar, through, and oblique. [8.3.4.1]
d. Longitudinal, laminar, and intermittent.
[8.3.3] 35. After welding, many steel weldments are heat treated to
obtain more uniform properties between the weld and
31. A slag inclusion can result from which of the following? base metal and to relieve stress. Which heat-treatment
method is often used following welding?
a. Small pieces of tungsten being dislodged from the
electrode in the gas tungsten arc process. a. Tempering.
b. Excessive overlap on intermediate passes in a b. Martensitic aging.
multipass weldment. c. Normalizing.
c. Insufficient cleaning of successive passes in a d. Spheroidizing.
multipass weldment. [8.3.4.1]
d. Contaminants in the welding flux.
[8.3.3]

101
 |
SECTION III MATERIALS, FABRICATION, AND PRODUCT TECHNOLOGY

36. When steel has been quench hardened and then 4. The process used for shaping metals by chemical
reheated to some point below the lower transformation dissolution only, with selective removal accomplished by
temperature for the purpose of reducing brittleness, this is masking areas where metal is not to be removed, is called:
called:
a. electrical discharge machining.
a. austenitization. b. chemical milling.
b. thermal slip deformation. c. electrochemical machining.
c. allotropic change. d. electroforming.
d. tempering. [9.4.2]
[8.3.4.2]

5. The acronym EDM refers to:

Chapter 9: Material Removal Processes a. engineering design materials.

b. energy discharge machines.
1. In describing machinability, three different measurements c. electrodynamic machining.
are generally considered on a relative, if not quantitative, d. electrical discharge machining.
basis. These are:
[9.4.3]
a. shear, tensile, and impact strength of the material
being machined.
b. surface finish of the material achievable, power
consumption required to remove a given volume of
Tool
material, and expected tool life. feed
c. softness of the material, sharpness of the cutting tool,
Tool
and type of machine used to remove the material.
d. volume of material before machining, volume of DC –
power
material after machining, and time required to supply Pump
remove that volume.
[9.1.4]

2. Equipment that aids in material removal from a workpiece

by establishing a suitable set of motions and maintaining
known positions are: Work

a. millworking machines. +
Electrolyte
b. factory machines.
c. machine tools. Figure 10
d. metal-cutting machines.
[9.2.1]
6. Figure 10 illustrates:
3. A cutting operation that has the ability to cut through
a. chemical milling.
thicknesses of more than 0.9 m (3 ft) of steel and is
commonly used to remove surface discontinuities on b. electrochemical machining.
castings and forgings by “scarfing” is called: c. ultrasonic machining.
d. electrolytic grinding.
a. oxyacetylene cutting.
[9.4.4]
b. friction cutting.
c. ultrasonic cutting.
d. plasma arc cutting.
[9.2.2.1]
 Chapter 10: Surface Treatments and Coatings
High-
frequency Magnetostrictive
amplifier transducer 1. Which of these are properties of surface coatings?

a. Weld strength, profile, and surface finish.

b. Corrosion protection, appearance, and change
surface friction.
Support and feed
at node c. Surface hardness, discontinuity covering, and fluid
Abrasive tight.
slurry
Tool d. Light protection, flux removal, and acoustic emission
reduction.
[10.1]

Figure 11
2. A pickling bath would be used in the manufacturing of
metallic components to:

7. The process illustrated in Figure 11 is called: a. apply a corrosion-resistant layer.

a. ultrasonic machining. b. remove iron-based oxides.

b. electrical discharge machining. c. produce an attractive green patina.

c. electrochemical machining. d. grow a wear-resistant layer of chromium or nickel.

d. abrasive drilling. [10.1]

[9.4.5]
3. Carburizing and flame hardening are examples of:

8. When used with respect to machine tools, the acronym a. annealing processes.
N/C means:
b. case-hardening processes.
a. nonmetal cutters. c. processes that produce ductile surfaces.
b. noncorrosive coolant. d. electrochemical processes.
c. numerical control. [10.2]
d. negative clearance.
[9.5] 4. Which of the following nondestructive tests would provide
the best results in measuring the case depth on a case-
hardened part?
9. Which of the following can result in economical setup and
reduced machine time with an increase in repeatability a. Ultrasonic immersion testing using a very low-
and accuracy for a variety of machining operations? frequency probe.

a. The use of NDT to evaluate the finished product. b. Radiographic testing.

b. The use of electrical discharge machining to replace c. Electromagnetic testing.

the conventional lathes and surface grinders. d. Magnetic particle testing.
c. The use of modern ultrasonic machining operations. [10.2.1]
d. The use of numerical control systems applied to
conventional types of machining operations. 5. The best and most economical cleaners used for removal
[9.5] of oils and greases are:

a. pickling baths.
b. deionized water sprays.
c. wire brushes and cloth buffers.
d. petroleum solvents.
[10.3.2]

103
 |
SECTION III MATERIALS, FABRICATION, AND PRODUCT TECHNOLOGY

6. Coatings are often applied to protect a material; 11. A process that converts the base metal surface to an
their thicknesses can frequently be determined oxidized barrier layer of very small porous cells is called:
nondestructively by:
a. galvanizing.
a. acoustic emission testing. b. anodizing.
b. electromagnetic testing. c. plating.
c. surface-wave ultrasonic techniques. d. metallizing.
d. optical holography. [10.4.5]
[10.4.2]

12. The anodized surface on aluminum:

7. A process that is the reverse of electrochemical machining
and that involves the deposition of metals on other metals a. can produce a high background during a penetrant
or nonmetals is called: test.
b. is very dense and makes X-ray penetration difficult.
a. chemical milling.
c. can produce cracks that are easily detected by
b. electrical discharge machining. electromagnetic testing techniques.
c. electroplating. d. must be removed before performing ultrasonic tests.
d. magnetoforming. [10.4.5]
[10.4.2]

13. A corrosion protection material commonly applied to

8. Metals commonly applied to other metals by steel by hot dipping and galvanizing is:
electroplating are:
a. porcelain.
a. nickel, chromium, and cadmium. b. paint.
b. tin, zinc, and tungsten. c. zinc.
c. silver, gold, and carbon. d. chromic acid.
d. copper, aluminum, and magnesium. [10.4.6.2]
[10.4.2]

9. Which coating process causes paint particles to be directly

Chapter 11: Introduction to Nondestructive Testing
attracted to a substrate to efficiently form an even coating?
1. Which of the following statements best differentiates a
a. Chemical conversion coating. defect from a discontinuity?
b. Electrostatic spraying.
a. Discontinuities can propagate and become defects.
c. Electroplating.
b. All discontinuities are defects.
d. Thermal spraying.
c. All defects will lead to failure if undetected;
[10.4.4]
discontinuities are harmless.
d. Discontinuities are external natural boundaries only;
10. Some materials, such as aluminum, are corrosion defects are internal flaws originating from errors in
resistant: processing.
[11.1]
a. by virtue of the immediate oxidation of newly
exposed surfaces.
b. only if anodized.
c. because the material itself will not readily combine
with oxygen.
d. against all types of corrosive atmospheres.
[10.4.5]
2. NDT is often differentiated from other measurement or 6. If properly used, NDT can assist in determining whether a
inspection techniques in that: test specimen is functioning as designed by:

a. NDT is a measurement of dimensions, geometry, and a. accurately measuring the tensile strength of design
appearance. materials.
b. NDT uses electronic instruments to identify, evaluate, b. predicting the time it will take a given size
and locate discontinuities. discontinuity to grow to a critical size.
c. NDT involves indirect tests related to some other c. determining the corrosion rate.
quality or characteristic of the material. d. providing an accurate evaluation of the number and
d. NDT is an inspection tool used to confirm the type of discontinuities that exist in a material.
findings of the many other quality assurance [11.2]
techniques.
[11.1]
7. Even at the early stages of product planning, NDT should
be considered because:
3. Which of the following are a function of NDT?
a. codes and specifications are too restrictive.
a. Testing product to failure point, product application, b. the design of the part should permit easy access to
and cost reduction. critical areas for later inspection.
b. Tensile tests, charpy tests, and vickers hardness c. the NDT method may strengthen the product.
testing.
d. the NDT processes are generally more time-intensive
c. Identifying material, checking for discontinuities, and than other processes.
testing without destroying the product.
[11.2]
d. Checking dimensions, geometry, and appearance.
[11.2]
8. Unexpectedly early fatigue failure can often be prevented
by using NDT to:
4. A false indication is one formed by a:
a. verify the cyclic loading on a component.
a. discontinuity larger than accept/reject criteria. b. detect surface discontinuities that could be stress
b. discontinuity smaller than accept/reject criteria. risers.
c. fatigue crack. c. measure the endurance limit of a part undergoing
d. factor unrelated to a discontinuity. cyclic stresses.
[11.2] d. determine percent elongation of a material before it is
placed in service.
[11.2]
5. An important basis for the success of NDT design
procedures is:
9. A technique for the inspection of manufactured products
a. the need to ensure that unexpected discontinuities that utilizes the selection of a certain percentage of parts
of some critical size are not present when the for inspection is called:
component enters service.
b. that all discontinuities are detected by NDT or proof a. standard deviation.
testing before the component enters service. b. natural selection.
c. in the use of large factors of safety. c. analysis of variance.
d. in the use of a value of strength that the material used d. sampling.
in the design is presumed to possess. [11.2]
[11.2]

105
 |
SECTION III MATERIALS, FABRICATION, AND PRODUCT TECHNOLOGY

10. Implied in sampling inspection is: 2. Devices that show magnified, reflected, or profile images
of the workpiece on a frosted glass screen are called
a. that the chosen plan will produce precise numbers of optical:
acceptable parts.
b. the need for a sample size of 100 units or multiples a. comparators.
thereof. b. flats.
c. an understanding that defective products may be c. projectors.
present and untested. d. micrometers.
d. the need to collect data in the form of variables [12.1.2.1]
instead of attributes.
[11.2]
3. An NDT method that has the ability to measure changes
in electrical conductivity caused by the effects of heat
11. A vernier line measurement in a visual acuity test permits treatment is:
verification of:
a. magnetic particle testing.
a. letter recognition. b. acoustic emission testing.
b. trichromatic vision. c. electromagnetic testing.
c. code interpretation. d. immersion ultrasonic testing.
d. hyperacuity. [12.8.1]
[11.3.2]

12. Factors of safety are often in the range of 2 to 4. These Chapter 13: NDT Applications
factors:
1. Process control based on the means and ranges of
a. are provided for engineering mistakes. measurements taken on periodic samples requires the
b. are added as a corrosion allowance. measurements to be taken of:
c. could possibly be reduced with the assurance
a. attributes.
of NDT techniques that the material was free of
discontinuities. b. variables or parameters.
d. provide allowances for poor welding techniques. c. either attributes or variables.
[11.3.3] d. neither attributes nor variables.
[13.1]

Chapter 12: Nondestructive Testing Methods 2. Monitoring temperature for industrial process control is
an example of:
1. In visual testing, which of the following measurement
tools uses the principle of light wave interference to check a. parameter-based measurement.
surface flatness? b. geometric dimensioning and tolerancing.
c. the direct comparison technique.
a. Optical comparator.
d. lateral measurement.
b. Vernier caliper.
[13.1]
c. Sine bar.
d. Optical flat.
[12.1.2.1]
3. Metal corrosion that is accelerated when the metal is 1.0
under load is called: 90%
0.8
a. pitting corrosion.
b. galvanic corrosion. 0.6

POD
c. intergranular corrosion.
d. stress corrosion. 0.4
[13.4.2]
0.2

Chapter 14: NDT and Engineering 0.0

0.002 0.005 0.020 0.050 ANDE 0.200
1. A statement that a particular experiment produced a
0.9 probability of detection with a 95% confidence level Length (in.)
means that: Figure 12

a. there is a 90% likelihood that the probability of

detection is overstated. 2. On the probability of detection (PoD) curve shown in
b. there is a 95% likelihood that the probability of Figure 12:
detection is overstated.
a. the ANDE line indicates the length of discontinuity
c. on average, 90% of discontinuities will be detected
that is undetectable in the given test.
95% of the time.
b. the Y axis is set for a 90% confidence level that
d. on average, 95% of discontinuities will be detected
detectable discontinuities will be detected.
90% of the time.
c. the Y axis is set for a 90% probability level that
[14.2]
detectable discontinuities will be detected.
d. only “hits” are recorded, not “misses.”
[14.2]

107
 |
SECTION III MATERIALS, FABRICATION, AND PRODUCT TECHNOLOGY

ANSWERS TO REVIEW QUESTIONS

Chapter 1: Manufacturing and Materials

1d 2a 3c 4d

Chapter 2: Classification, Structure, and Solidification of Materials

1c 2c 3b 4a 5c 6a 7c 8d 9a 10a 11b 12a

Chapter 3: Properties of Materials

1a 2d 3c 4b 5c 6d 7a 8a 9b 10d 11a

Chapter 4: Production and Properties of Common Metals

1a 2b 3d 4c 5a 6d 7d 8c 9b 10b 11c 12d 13b 14d

15c 16b 17b 18a 19a 20c

Chapter 5: Polymers, Ceramics, and Composites

1b 2c 3d 4a 5d 6a 7c 8a 9d 10b

Chapter 6: Casting

1a 2b 3d 4b 5c 6d 7a 8b 9a 10c 11c 12d 13b 14a

15c 16d 17a 18b 19b

Chapter 7: Metal Forming

1a 2c 3c 4d 5b 6a 7b 8a 9c 10d 11b 12b 13c 14b

15a 16b 17d 18b 19c 20b 21a 22a 23d 24c 25a 26b 27c 28b
29a

Chapter 8: Joining and Fastening

1d 2c 3d 4b 5a 6a 7b 8b 9c 10a 11c 12a 13a 14d

15b 16b 17d 18b 19a 20d 21b 22c 23a 24c 25b 26d 27b 28c
29a 30b 31c 32a 33b 34a 35c 36d

Chapter 9: Material Removal Processes

1b 2c 3a 4b 5d 6b 7a 8c 9d

Chapter 10: Surface Treatments and Coatings

1b 2b 3b 4c 5d 6b 7c 8a 9b 10a 11b 12a 13c

Chapter 11: Introduction to Nondestructive Testing

1a 2c 3c 4d 5a 6d 7b 8b 9d 10c 11d 12c

Chapter 12: Nondestructive Testing Methods

1d 2a 3c

Chapter 13: NDT Applications

1b 2a 3d

Chapter 14: NDT and Engineering

1c 2c
 | APPENDIXES

APPENDIX A

CODE OF ETHICS FOR LEVEL III PERSONNEL

CERTIFIED BY ASNT
The “Code of Ethics for Level III NDT Personnel Certified 2. Integrity
by ASNT” is part of the ASNT Level III Certification Application 2.1 The Level III is obligated to act with complete
for the Basic examination and all method examinations, includ- integrity in professional matters for each client or
ing the PdM Basic and IR method examinations. By signing the employer as a faithful agent or trustee; shall be
honest and impartial; and shall serve the public,
application, the applicant agrees to abide by the Code of Ethics
clients, and employer with devotion;
for as long as he or she is certified. A link to the ASNT Level III
2.2 The Level III shall make claims regarding
Certification Application may be downloaded from the ASNT certification only with respect to the scope for
website at asnt.org under the Certification drop-down menu. which certification has been granted; and
The text of the Code of Ethics is reprinted below in full: 2.3 The Level III shall not use their certification in a
misleading manner or in such a manner as to
1. Preamble bring ASNT into disrepute. The Level III shall not
1.1 In order to safeguard the life, health, property, make any statement regarding the certification,
and welfare of the public, to maintain integrity which ASNT may consider misleading or
and high standards of skills and practices in the unauthorized.
profession of nondestructive testing, the following
rules of professional conduct shall be binding
3. Responsibly to ASNT
upon every person issued a certificate by ASNT as
a Level III.
1.1.1 The Level III who holds a certificate is The Level III Shall:
charged with having knowledge of the 3.1 Immediately report to ASNT any perceived
existence of the reasonable rules and violation(s) of this Code of Ethics or any attempt
regulations hereinafter provided for his/ to pressure or force a certified individual to violate
her conduct as ASNT Level III, and also this Code of Ethics.
shall be familiar with their provisions 3.2 Not attempt to cheat on ASNT examinations,
and understand them. Such knowledge attempt to bribe or threaten ASNT / Pearson
shall encompass the understanding that Vue or other third-party testing personnel, falsify
the practice of nondestructive testing documents, falsel claim, misrepresent or permit
under this certification is a privilege, misrepresentation or misuse of their own or
as opposed to a right, and the Level others professional qualifications, knowledge,
III shall be forthright and candid in training, experience, work responsibilities, or
statements or written responses to the certifications.
Ethics Committee of the Certification 3.3 Inform employer/client in the event that
Management Board. certification is suspended, cancelled, or
1.1.2 The “Level III” as referred to herein is withdrawn and return to ASNT Level III certificate
that individual who has been issued and wallet card immediately; and
a certificate by the American Society 3.3.1 Immediately discontinue the use of the
for Nondestructive Testing, Inc. ASNT logo. Due to ASNT’s trademark
pursuant to its heretofore published copyright, ASNT logo is not to be use
requirements, rules, and procedures for by any individual or entity without the
such certification. This Code of Ethics is explicit written consent of ASNT.
binding upon all individuals so certified.

APPENDIX A 109
APPENDIXES |
4. Responsibility to the Public 5. Public Statements
5.1 The Level III will issue no statements, criticisms,
The Level III shall: or arguments on nondestructive testing matters
4.1 Protect the safety, health, and welfare of the connected with public policy which are inspired
public in the performance of professional duties. or paid for by an interested party, or parties,
Should the case arise where the Level III faces a unless he/she has prefaced the remark(s) by
situation where the safety, health, and welfare of explicitly identifying himself/herself, by disclosing
the public are not protected, he/she shall: the identities of the party, on whose behalf he/
4.1.1 Apprise the proper authority if it is she is speaking, and by revealing the existence of
evident that the safety, health, and any pecuniary interest he/she may have in these
welfare of the public are not being matters.
protected; and 5.2 The Level III will publicly express no opinion on a
4.1.2 Refuse to accept responsibility for the nondestructive testing matter unless it is founded
design, report, or statement involved; upon adequate knowledge of the facts in issue,
and upon a background of technical competence in
4.1.3 If necessary, sever relationship with the the subject matter, and upon honest conviction of
employer or client; and the accuracy and propriety of the testimony.
4.1.4 Undertake to perform assignments 5.3 The Level III shall show professional and
only when qualified by training and appropriate behavior, including, but not limited
experience in the specific technical to, online and social media. The term “social
fields involved. In the event a question media” is used within this Code to describe
arises as to the competence of a Level dynamic and socially interactive networked
III to perform an assignment in a field information and communication technologies by
of specific discipline which cannot which personal information or opinions can be
be otherwise resolved to the Ethics presented for public consumption on the Internet.
Committee’s satisfaction, the Ethics
Committee, either upon request of 6. Conflict of Interest
the Level III, or by its own volition, 6.1 The Level III shall conscientiously avoid conflict
may require him/her to submit to an of interest with the employer or client, but
appropriate inquiry by or on behalf of when avoidable, shall forthwith disclose the
the Ethics Committee; and circumstances to the employer or client.
4.1.5 Be completely objective in any 6.2 The Level III shall promptly inform the client or
professional report, statement, or employer of any business associations, interests,
testimony, avoiding any omission or circumstances which could influence his/her
which would, or reasonably could, judgment or the quality of services to the client or
lead to fallacious inference, finding, or employer.
misrepresentation; and 6.3 The Level III shall not accept compensation,
4.1.6 Express an opinion as a technical witness financial or otherwise, from more than one
before any court, commission, or other party for services on the same project, or for
tribunal, only when such opinion is services pertaining to the same project, unless
founded upon adequate knowledge of the circumstances are fully disclosed to, and
the facts in issue, upon a background agreed to, by all interested parties or their duly
of technical competence in the subject authorized agents.
matter, and upon an honest conviction 6.4 The Level III shall not solicit or accept financial
of the accuracy or propriety of the or other valuable consideration from material or
testimony. equipment suppliers for specifying their products.
 6.5 The Level III shall not solicit or accept gratuities, 9. Unauthorized Practice
directly or indirectly, from contractors, their 9.1 Any violation of this Code shall be deemed to
agents, or other parties dealing with the client or be an unauthorized practice and upon proper
employer in connection with work for which he/ complaint, investigation, due process hearing
she is responsible. and ruling of the Ethics Committee of the ASNT
6.6 As an elected, retained, or employed public Certification Management Council in accordance
official, the Level III (in the capacity as a public with procedures heretofore established and
official) shall not review or approve work that was published, sanctions may be applied to the
performed by himself/herself, or under his/her individual(s) in violation.
direction, on behalf of another employer or client. 9.2 If the applied sanction is suspension or revocation
of certification, the certificate holder agrees to
7. Solicitation of Employment discontinue all claims of ASNT certification and
7.1 The Level III shall not pay, solicit, nor offer, must return all certificates and wallet cards issued
directly or indirectly, any bribe or commission for by ASNT.
professional employment with the exception of
payment of the usual commission for securing 10. Rulings of Other Jurisdictions
salaried positions through licensed employment Conviction of an NDT-related felony while ASNT
agencies. certification is valid or the revocation or suspension of a
7.2 The Level III shall seek professional employment Professional Engineer’s License by another jurisdiction
on the basis of qualification and competence for or similar rulings by other professional associations may
proper accomplishment of work. be grounds for a charge of violation of this Code.
7.3 The Level III shall not falsify or permit
misrepresentation of his/her, or his/her I agree to abide by this Code of Ethics.
associates’, academic or professional qualification.
He/she shall not misrepresent or exaggerate
the degree of responsibility in or for the subject
matter of prior assignments.
7.4 Brochures or other presentations incident to the NAME (PLEASE PRINT)
solicitation of employment shall not misrepresent
pertinent facts concerning employers,
employees, associates, joint ventures, or past
accomplishments with the intent and purpose of SIGNATURE
enhancing qualifications and work.

8. Improper Conduct
8.1 The Level III shall not sign documents for work for
which he/she does not have personal professional DATE (MM/DD/YYYY)
knowledge and direct technical supervisory
control and responsibility.
8.2 The Level III shall not knowingly associate with, or
permit the use of, his/her name or firm name in a
business venture by any person or firm which he/
she knows, or has reason to believe is engaging in
business or professional practices of a fraudulent
or dishonest nature.
8.3 The Level III shall conduct themselves in an honest
and ethical manner. It is expected that Level
IIIs observe all laws applicable to our business,
including but not limited to international, federal,
state/provincial, and local laws.
8.4 While this Code addresses many ethical issues,
it cannot address every issue that a Level III may
encounter. As such, if a situation arises in which a
Level III is unsure if an action would be deemed
unethical, the Level III may consult ASNT.

APPENDIX A 111
APPENDIXES |
APPENDIX B

CP-ASNT-1D: ASNT NDT LEVEL III PROGRAM

CP-ASNT-1D is a document that outlines and describes the 2.7 Examination, Method: A Level III written
ASNT NDT Level III Program. It is reprinted below in full. examination on the principles, theory, techniques
and applications within an NDT/PdM method.
2.8 Examination, Specific: An examination on
1. Scope
specifications, equipment, techniques, and
1.1 It is recognized that the effectiveness of
procedures applicable to the employer’s
nondestructive testing NDT and predictive
product(s) and methods.
maintenance (PdM) applications depends
2.9 Experience: Work activities accomplished in
upon the capabilities of the personnel who are
the applicable NDT/PdM method under the
responsible for, and perform, NDT or PdM. The
direction of qualified supervision, including the
ASNT NDT Level III program provides third-party
performance of the method and related activities
certification for NDT or PdM personnel whose
but not including time spent in organized training
specific jobs require appropriate knowledge of
programs.
the technical principles underlying the test they
2.10 Qualification: Demonstration or possession
perform, witness, monitor, or evaluate.
of education, skills, training, knowledge, and
1.2 This document establishes the system for ASNT
experience required for personnel to properly
NDT Level III certification in nondestructive testing
perform NDT to a level as specified in this
and predictive maintenance in accordance with
document.
Recommended Practice No. SNT-TC-1A: Personnel
2.11 Recertification: The process of extending one’s
Qualification and Certification in Nondestructive
certification after the initial period of validity and
Testing (SNT-TC-1A). Certification under this
maintaining certification for a specified period
system results in the issuance of an ASNT
thereafter.
certificate attesting to the fact that the certificate
2.12 SNT-TC-1A: The NDT Personnel Qualification and
holder has met the published guidelines for the
Certification in Nondestructive Testing document
Basic and Method Examinations as detailed in
providing the guidelines for the establishment of
SNT-TC-1A.
qualification and certification programs for NDT.
2.13 Training: An organized program developed to
2. Definitions impart the knowledge and skills necessary for
2.1 ASNT Certification: The process whereby ASNT qualification.
certifies that an individual has met the Basic and
Method Examination guidelines of SNT-TC-1A.
3. Certification Outcome
2.2 ASNT NDT Level III: An individual who, having
3.1 An ASNT NDT Level III certificate holder shall have
passed ASNT administered Basic and Method(s)
the skills and knowledge to establish techniques,
Examinations, holds a current, valid ASNT NDT
to interpret codes, standards, and specifications,
Level III certificate in at least one method.
and to prepare or approve procedures and
2.3 Certification: Written testimony of qualification.
instructions.
2.4 Employer: The corporate, private, or public entity
3.2 An ASNT NDT Level III shall also have general
that employs personnel for wages or salary and is
familiarity with other nondestructive testing
responsible for authorizing personnel to perform
methods, shall be capable of conducting or
NDT or PdM.
directing the training and examination of
2.5 Examination, NDT Basic: A Level III written
testing personnel in the methods for which the
examination of knowledge of materials science
ASNT NDT Level III is qualified and shall have
and processes technology, NDT personnel
knowledge of materials, fabrication, and product
qualification and certification, and the Basic
technology in order to establish techniques and
principles of NDT methods.
to assist in establishing acceptance criteria when
2.6 Examination, PdM Basic: A Level III written
none are otherwise available.
examination of knowledge of machinery
technology, PdM personnel qualification and
certification, and the Basic principles of PdM
methods.
 3.3 An ASNT PdM Level III shall also have general 5.2 Examination Descriptions
familiarity with other predictive maintenance 5.2.1 NDT Basic Examination: This written
methods, shall be capable of conducting or examination consists of 135 questions
directing the training and examination of that assess the candidate’s knowledge of:
testing personnel in the methods for which the 5.2.1.1 other NDT methods as
ASNT NDT Level III is qualified and shall have required for ASNT NDT Level II
knowledge of applicable machinery technology personnel;
in order to establish techniques and to assist in 5.2.1.2 materials, fabrication, and
establishing acceptance criteria when none are product technology; and
otherwise available. 5.2.1.3 qualification and certification
according to the ASNT,
4. Eligibility for Examination SNT-TC-1A, and ANSI/ASNT
4.1 ASNT has no restrictions relative to the gender, CP-189, latest edition.
creed, race, or nationality of applicants. 5.2.2 PdM Basic Examination: This written
4.2 Candidates shall have a combination of education examination consists of 90 questions that
and experience in accordance with the guidelines assess the candidate’s knowledge of:
in SNT-TC-1A. 5.2.2.1 other PdM methods as
4.3 When applying for examination(s), the candidate required for ASNT NDT Level II
shall document the validity of the personal personnel;
information requested, including education and 5.2.2.2 applicable machinery
experience needed to establish eligibility. technology; and
4.4 The Candidate shall agree to abide by the code of 5.2.2.3 qualification and certification
ethics for ASNT NDT Level III personnel. according to the ASNT,
4.5 A maximum of three (3) examinations in any SNT-TC-1A, and ANSI/ASNT
Method or the Basic Examination is permitted CP-189, latest edition.
within a two (2) year period. 5.2.3 Method Examination: This written
4.5.1 A candidate that fails the initial Basic examination consists of a minimum of
or Method Examination shall not be 90 questions that assess the candidate’s
permitted to retake the examination for knowledge and application of
thirty (30) days from the date of failure. fundamentals, principles, and techniques
4.5.2 A candidate that fails the Basic or for that method in which certification is
Method Examination for a second (2nd) sought. The Method Examination may
time shall not be permitted to retake the include a portion that examines the
examination for ninety (90) days from the candidate’s ability to comprehend a
date of failure. specification and apply its requirements.
4.5.3 A candidate that fails the Basic or 5.3 NDT/PdM or PdM/NDT Conversion
Method Examination for a third (3rd) 5.3.1 Personnel with currently valid NDT
time shall not be permitted to retake the certificates in Methods for which PdM
examination for one (1) year from the certification is available may attain
date of failure and must reapply as a new PdM Certification in those Methods by
candidate. In no case, shall an individual successfully completing the PdM Basic
be permitted to sit for an examination Examination.
more than three (3) times in a two (2) 5.3.2 Personnel with currently valid PdM
year period. certificates may attain NDT Certification
in those Methods by successfully
completing the NDT Basic Examination.
5. Qualification Examinations
5.4 Employer Responsibility
5.1 Eligibility. All ASNT NDT Level III Candidates must
5.4.1 Additional, specific examinations may
successfully complete both:
be required by employers, customers,
5.1.1 a Basic Examination, regardless of the
or other bodies. Examinations for
method(s) for which the candidate seeks
specialized NDT/PdM techniques
certification; and
or unique product forms are the
5.1.2 a Method Examination, which is given at
responsibility of the employer and are
the candidates’ request, in one or more
outside the scope of this document.
of 11 different NDT methods, or two PdM
5.5 Examination Grading
methods.
5.5.1 The grading of qualification examinations
shall be done by ASNT Certification
Department Staff in accordance with
nationally accepted psychometric
principles.

APPENDIX B 113
APPENDIXES |
6. Examination Results 9. Recertification
6.1 Candidates that successfully pass all required 9.1 Recertification is required at five (5) year intervals
examinations for ASNT certification, shall be in order to extend certification beyond the initial
issued certification documents as described in or previous period of validity.
7.0, Certification. 9.2 Certified individuals may recertify in one of the
6.2 Candidates that do not pass all required following two ways:
examinations for ASNT certification will be sent 9.2.1 By examination, prior to expiration of
written notification of their results and may certification in the applicable method.
reapply to retake the failed examinations. The Basic Examination does not have to
6.3 For employers wishing to use ASNT as a third- be taken again as long as certification is
party examination source for the purpose of continuously maintained; or
adding Methods for in-house Level III personnel, 9.2.2 By application through points,
examination results will be sent by letter only. No demonstrating a combination of
certificate will be issued. active employment and continuing
6.4 Notification of results will be sent to each participation/education in NDT/PdM.
candidate within thirty (30) business days from 9.3 Personnel that attempt renewal by examination
the date of the examination. and fail an examination may not renew by points
in that test method until the examination has been
7. Certification passed.
7.1 Based on successful completion of the necessary
qualification examinations, ASNT will issue the 10. Applicant Rights
candidate an ASNT certificate and wallet card. 10.1 Appeals, Complaints, and Disputes: An appeals
7.2 ASNT certification attests to an individual having process exists for the resolution of appeals,
satisfied the requirements for the Basic and complaints, and disputes received from
Method Examinations as detailed in SNT-TC-1A. candidates, certified persons, their employers and
This does not constitute license or authorization other parties regarding the certification process,
to perform NDT or PdM, as the employer has the qualification criteria, or the performance of
sole responsibility for authorizing employees certified persons.
to perform NDT/PdM. The employer, through a 10.2 Confidentiality: Information gained in the course
Level III, or other designated person as denoted of the certification process shall not be disclosed
in the employer’s written practice, should to any third party except as required by law.
review the individual’s qualification records for
satisfactory completeness prior to authorizing the 11. Program Changes
individual to perform NDT or PdM. These records Changes to the ASNT NDT Level III program
shall be retained as specified SNT-TC-1A. are posted on the ASNT Internet website, at
7.3 ASNT NDT and PdM Level III certificates and www.asnt.org under the “Certification” link, and
wallet cards remain the property of ASNT and notification of changes will be published in the
shall be surrendered to ASNT on demand. ASNT monthly periodical, Materials Evaluation
magazine.
8. Validity
8.1 Initial certification shall be valid for a period of 12. Accommodation for Disabilities
five (5) years, with the certification period to start ASNT will make appropriate accommodations for
on the date that a candidate successfully passes persons with documented disabilities. Candidates
both the Basic and Method Examinations. should contact the ASNT Technical Services
8.1.1 When the Basic Examination is passed, Department prior to examination dates to arrange
that result shall remain valid for a period special accommodations.
of 5 years from the examination date. If
the Method Examination is not passed
within that period, the Basic Examination
must be retaken.
8.1.2 When the Method Examination is
passed, that result shall remain valid for
a period of 2 years from the examination
date. If the Basic Examination is not
passed within that period, the Method
Examination must be retaken.
8.2 Certification shall be revoked if ASNT determines
that an ASNT certificate holder has violated the
ASNT NDT Level III code of ethics.
APPENDIX C

MEASUREMENT UNITS FOR

NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING
In 1960, the General Conference on Weights and Measures TA BLE 2

established the International System of Units (SI). SI units are SI derived units with special names.a
designed so that a single set of measurement units can be used
Relation
by all branches of science, engineering, and the general public. Quantity Units Symbol to Other
SI units are the modern version of the metric system and end SI Unitsb

the division between metric units used by scientists and metric Capacitance farad F C · V–1
units used by engineers and the public. For example, scientists
Catalytic activity katal kat s –1 · mol
have given up their units based on centimeter and gram, and
engineers have abandoned the kilogram-force in favor of the
Conductance siemens S A · V –1
newton. Electrical engineers have retained the ampere, volt, and
ohm, but changed all units related to magnetism. Energy joule J N·m
Table 1 lists the seven base SI units. Table 2 lists derived
Frequency (periodic) hertz Hz 1 · s –1
units with special names. In SI units, the unit of time is the
second (s); the hour (h) is also recognized for common use. Force newton N kg · m·s –2
Traditional or imperial units should not be used in science and
Inductance henry H Wb · A –1
engineering. Table 3 gives some conversions to SI units.
In science and engineering, very large or very small numbers Illuminance lux lx lm · m –2
with units are expressed by using multipliers, prefixes of 103 or
Luminous flux lumen lm cd · sr
10–3 intervals (Table 4). The multiplier becomes a part of the SI
symbol. For example, a millimeter (mm) is 0.001 meter (m). The Electric charge coulomb C A·s
volume unit cubic centimeter (cm3) is (0.01 m)3. Unit submulti-
Electric potentialc volt V W · A –1
ples such as the centi, deci, and hecto are less common in sci-
entific and technical uses of SI units because of their variance Electric resistance ohm W V · A –1
from the convenient 103 or 10–3 intervals that make equations
Magnetic flux weber Wb V·s
easy to manipulate.
In the International System of Units, the distinction between Magnetic flux density tesla T Wb · m –2
upper and lower case letters is meaningful and should be
Plane angle radian rad 1
observed. For example, the meanings of the prefix m (milli) and
the prefix M (mega) differ by nine orders of magnitude. Power watt W J · s –1
For more information, the reader is referred to the informa-
Pressure (stress) pascal Pa N · m –2
tion available through national standards organizations and spe-
cialized information compiled by technical organizations. Radiation absorbed dose gray Gy J · kg –1
TA BLE 1
Radiation dose equivalent sievert Sv J · kg –1
SI Base Units
Radioactivity becquerel Bq 1 · s –1
Quantity Unit Symbol
Solid angle steradian sr 1
Length meter m
degree
Temperature °C K
Celsius
Mass kilogram kg
Timea hour h 3600 s
Time second s
Volumea liter L dm3
Electric current ampere A
a. Hour and liter are not SI units but are accepted for use with SI.
Temperature kelvin K
b. Number one (1) expresses a dimensionless relationship.
Amount of substance mole mol c. Electromotive force.

Luminous intensity candela cd

APPENDIX C 115
APPENDIXES |
TA BLE 3

Examples of conversions to SI units.

Quantity Measurement in Non-SI Unit Multiply by To Get Measurement in SI Unit

minute (min) 2.908 882 × 10 –4 radian (rad)

Angle
degree (deg) 1.745 329 × 10 –2 radian (rad)

Area square inch (in. 2) 645 square millimeter (mm2)

angstrom (Å) 0.1 nanometer (nm)

Distance
inch (in.) 25.4 millimeter (mm)

British thermal unit (BTU) 1.055 kilojoule (kJ)

Energy
calorie (cal), thermochemical 4.184 joule (J)

Power British thermal unit per hour (BTU · h –1) 0.293 watt (W)

British thermal unit per pound degree kilojoule per kilogram per kelvin
Specific heat 4.19
fahrenheit (BTU·lbm –1 · °F–1) (kJ·kg –1 · K–1)

Force pound force 4.448 newton (N)

Torque (couple) foot-pound (ft - lbf) 1.36 newton meter (N·m)

Pressure pound force per square inch (lbf · in.–2) 6.89 kilopascal (kPa)

Frequency (cycle) cycle per minute 60 –1 hertz (Hz)

footcandle (ftc) 10.76 lux (lx)

Illuminance
phot (ph) 10000 lux (lx)

candela per square foot (cd · ft–2) 10.76 candela per square meter (cd · m –2)

candela per square inch (cd · in.–2) 1.550 003 × 10 –3 candela per square meter (cd · m –2)

footlambert (ftl) 3.426 candela per square meter (cd · m –2)

Luminance
lambert 3.183 099 × 10 –3 candela per square meter (cd · m –2)

nit (nt) 1 candela per square meter (cd · m –2)

stilb (sb) 10 000 candela per square meter (cd · m –2)

Radioactivity curie (Ci) 37 gigabecquerel (GBq)

Ionizing radiation exposure roentgen (R) 0.258 millicoulomb per kilogram (mC · kg –1)

Mass pound (lbm) 0.454 kilogram (kg)

Temperature (increment) degree fahrenheit (°F) 0.556 kelvin (K) or degree celsius (°C)

Temperature (scale) degree fahrenheit (°F) (°F – 32) ÷ 1.8 degree celsius (°C)

Temperature (scale) degree fahrenheit (°F) (°F – 32) ÷ 1.8 + 273.15 kelvin (K)
TA BLE 4

SI prefixes and multipliers.

Prefix Symbol Multiplier

yotta Y 1024

zetta Z 1021

exa E 1018

peta P 1015

tera T 1012

giga G 109

mega M 106

kilo k 103

hectoa h 102

dekaa da 10

decia d 10 –1

centia c 10 –2

milli m 10 –3

micro µ 10 –6

nano n 10 –9

pico p 10 –12

femto f 10 –15

atto a 10 –18

zepto z 10 –21

yocto y 10 –24

a. Avoid these prefixes (except in dm3 and cm3) for science and
engineering.

APPENDIX C 117
 ISBN: 978-1-57117-496-3
Catalog No.: 10108

The American Society for

Nondestructive Testing Inc.